Fujitsu Refrigerator 990TX2 User Manual

PC-Doctor is a trademark of  
Watergate Software,Inc.  
COPYRIGHT  
Fujitsu PC Corporation has made every eort to  
ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document.  
However, as ongoing development eorts are contin-  
ually improving the capabilities of our products,we  
cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this  
document.We disclaim liability for errors, omissions,  
or future changes.  
LapLink is a registered trademark of  
Traveling Software Inc.  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
according to FCC Part 15  
AudioRack is a registered trademark of  
ESS Technology, Inc.  
Responsible Party Name: Fujitsu PC Corporation  
Address: 598 Gibraltar Drive  
Milpitas, CA 95035  
MegaPhone is a registered trademark of  
AVEO, Inc.  
Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks  
and LifeBook is a trademark of Fujitsu Limited.  
Telephone: (408) 935-8800  
Tioman is a trademark of  
Agaté Technoligies.  
Declares that product: Model: LifeBook 990Tx  
2.  
Built for Humans and ErgoTrac are trademarks of  
Fujitsu Personal Computer Corporation.  
VirusScan is a registered trademark of  
McAfee Associates Inc.  
Complies with Part 15  
of the FCC Rules.  
The following are registered trademarks of  
IBM Corporation:IBM, IBM PC AT, IBM PS/2.  
All other trademarks mentioned herein are the  
property of their respective owners.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Operations is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device must not be allowed to cause harmful  
interference, (2) This device must accept any inter-  
ference received, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
The following are registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation:MS,MS-DOS, Windows 95.  
We cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this  
document.We disclaim liability for errors, omissions,  
or future changes.  
PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer  
Memory Card International Association.  
© Copyright 1998 Fujitsu PC Corporation. All rights  
reserved. No part of this publication may be copied,  
reproduced, or translated, without prior written consent  
of Fujitsu PC Corporation. No part of this publication  
may be stored or transmitted in any electronic form  
without the written consent of Fujitsu PC Corporation.  
Phoenix and the Phoenix logo are registered  
trademarks of Phoenix Technologies,Ltd.  
David Woo  
   
Fujitsu  
  
2/20/98  
  
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and MMX  
technology is a trademark of Intel Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This equipment includes automatic dialing capability.  
When programming and/or making test calls to  
emergency numbers:  
Public transportation terminals where telephones  
are used to call taxis or to reserve lodging or  
rental cars.  
The LifeBook 900 Series notebook computers are  
supplied with an internal modem which complies with  
the Industry Canada certification standards for telecom-  
munication network protection and safety requirements.  
Before connecting this equipment to a telephone line the  
user should ensure that it is permissible to connect this  
equipment to the local telecommunication facilities.The  
user should be aware that compliance with the certifica-  
tion standards does not prevent service degradation in  
some situations.  
In hotel and motel rooms as at least ten percent  
of the rooms must contain hearing aid compatible  
telephones or jacks for plug-in hearing aid compati-  
ble telephones which will be provided to hearing  
impaired customers on request.  
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the  
dispatcher the reason for the call.  
Perform such activities in o-peak hours, such  
as early morning or late evening.  
FCC rules prohibit the use of non-hearing aid  
compatible telephones in the following locations  
or applications:  
DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES  
Notice to Users of Radios and Television  
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements  
of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment  
Regulations.  
Repairs to telecommunication equipment should be  
made by a Canadian authorized maintenance facility. Any  
repairs or alterations not expressly approved by Fujitsu  
PC Corporation or any equipment failures may give the  
telecommunication company cause to request the user  
to disconnect the equipment from the telephone line.  
All public or semipublic coin-operated or  
credit card telephones.  
Elevators,highways, tunnels (automobile, subway,  
railroad or pedestrian) where a person with  
impaired hearing might be isolated in an emergency.  
CET appareil numérique de la class B respecte toutes  
les exigence du Réglement sur le matérial brouilleur  
du Canada.  
Places where telephones are specifically installed  
The connecting arrangement code for this equipment  
is CA11A.  
to alert emergency authorities such as fire, police  
or medical assistance personnel.  
Notice to Users of the Canadian  
Telephone Network  
The Load Number is 3.  
Hospital rooms, residential health care facilities,  
The Canadian Industry Canada label identifies certified  
equipment.This certification means that the equipment  
meets certain telecommunications network protective,  
operational and safety requirements. The Department  
does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the  
users satisfaction.  
The Load Number assigned to each telephone terminal  
device denotes the percentage of the total load to be  
connected to a telephone loop or circuit which is used  
by the device to prevent overloading. The termination  
on a loop may consist of any combination of devices  
such that the total of the load numbers of all devices  
does not exceed 100.  
convalescent homes and prisons.  
Workstations for the hearing impaired.  
Hotel,motel or apartment lobbies.  
Stores where telephones are used by patrons  
to order merchandise.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Avis Aux Utilisateurs Du Réseau  
Téléphonique Canadien  
Les réparations de léquipement de télécommunications  
doivent être effectuées par un service de maintenance  
agréé au Canada. Toute réparation ou modification,qui  
n’est pas expressément approuvée par Fujitsu PC Corp.,  
ou toute défaillance de l’équipement peut entraîner  
la compagnie de télécommunications à exiger que  
l’utilisateur déconnecte l’équipement de la  
C A U T I O N  
Létiquette canadienne Industrie Canada identifie  
l’équipement certifié. Cette certification signifie  
que l’équipement satisfait certaines normes de  
protection,d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux  
de télécommunications.Le département ne garantit  
pas le fonctionnement de l’équipement à la  
satisfaction de lutilisateur.  
For safety, users should ensure that the electrical  
ground of the power utility, the telephone lines  
and the metallic water pipes are connected  
together. Users should NOT attempt to make  
such connections themselves but should contact  
the appropriate electric inspection authority or  
electrician. This may be particularly important  
in rural areas.  
ligne téléphonique.  
Le code darrangement de connexion de cet équipement  
est CA11A.  
La série LifeBookTM 900 possèdent un modem  
interne conforme aux normes de certification  
dIndustrie Canada pour protéger les réseaux de  
télécommunications et satisfaire aux normes de  
sécurité.Avant de connecter cet équipement à une  
ligne téléphonique,l’utilisateur doit vérifier sil est  
permis de connecter cet équipement aux installations  
de télécommunications locales. Lutilisateur est averti  
que même la conformité aux normes de certification  
ne peut dans certains cas empêcher la dégradation  
du service.  
Le numéro de charge est 3.  
Le numéro de charge assigné à chaque terminal  
téléphonique indique le pourcentage de la charge  
totale pouvant être connecté à une boucle ou à un  
circuit téléphonique,utilisé par ce périphérique afin  
de prévenir toute surcharge.La terminaison d’une  
boucle peut être constituée de n’importe quelle  
combinaison de péri-phériques de sorte que le total  
de numéros de charge de tous les périphériques  
n’excède pas 100.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UL NOTICE (FOR AUTHORIZED REPAIR TECHNICIANS ONLY)  
CAUTION:For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only  
with the same type and rating fuse.  
A V E R T I S S E M E N T  
Pour assurer la sécurité, les utilisateurs  
doivent vérifier que la prise de terre du service  
d’électricité, les lignes téléphoniques et les  
conduites d’eau métalliques sont connectées  
ensemble. Les utilisateurs NE doivent PAS  
tenter d’établir ces connexions eux-mêmes,  
mais doivent contacter les services d’inspection  
d’installations électriques appropriés ou un  
électricien. Ceci peut être particulièrement  
important en régions rurales.  
CAUTION:Danger of explosion if CMOS battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the  
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the  
manufacturers instruction.  
WARNING:CMOS and NiCAD batteries may explode if mistreated.  
Do not recharge,disassemble or dispose of in fire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T a  
b
l
e
o
f
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
s
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v  
SECTION TWO  
SECTION THREE  
CONFIGURING YOUR  
LIFEBOOK 900 SERIES  
USING YOUR LIFEBOOK 900 SERIES  
SECTION ONE  
Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Keyboard Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Status Indicator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Fujitsu Welcome Center. . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Integrated ErgoTracTM Pointing Device. . . . 29  
Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Hard Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Infrared Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Pre-Installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
SETTING UP YOUR LIFEBOOK  
900 SERIES  
Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Identifying the Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
BIOS Setup Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Navigating Through the Setup Utility . . . . 59  
Main Menu – Setting Standard  
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Advanced Menu – Setting Device  
Feature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Security Menu – Setting the  
Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Power Menu – Setting Power  
Management Feature Controls. . . . . . . 96  
Boot Menu – Selecting the  
Operating System Source . . . . . . . . . 104  
Info Menu – Displaying Basic  
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Exit Menu – Leaving the Setup Utility . . . 110  
Setting Up Your Save-To-Disk  
Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Overview of LifeBook 900  
Series Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Top and Front Components . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Left-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Right-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . 7  
Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Bottom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Starting Your LifeBook  
for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
User Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Learning About Your Operating System  
and Application Software. . . . . . . . . . 15  
File Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r o m F u j i t s u  
T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s  
USB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
External Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Memory Upgrade Module. . . . . . . . . . 134  
Optional LANdock  
SECTION FOUR  
SECTION SIX  
USER INSTALLABLE FEATURES  
CARE AND MAINTENANCE  
User Installable Features . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Multi-function Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Optional Second Lithium ion Battery. . . . 123  
Optional Second Hard Drive . . . . . . . . 124  
PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Battery Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
MIDI/joystick Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Theft Prevention Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Stereo Line In Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Serial Port Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Parallel Port Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Caring for Your Notebook . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Increasing Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Caring for Your Batteries . . . . . . . . . . 173  
or Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
SECTION FIVE  
APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Identifying the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Specific Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Power On Self Test Messages . . . . . . . . 166  
Emergency CD-ROM Drive Tray Release. . 169  
Modem Setup and Commands . . . . . . . 169  
Restoring Your Pre-Installed Software  
LifeBook 990Tx Specifications . . . . . . . 176  
2
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Popular Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
APPENDIX B GLOSSARY . . . . . . .181  
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
From CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P r e f a c e  
Li feB ook 900 Se ries fr om Fujit su  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P
r
e
f
a
c
e
CONVENTIONS USED IN THE GUIDE  
Screen examples in this manual are intended as  
examples only, and screen and file names may  
dier in actual use.  
PREFACE  
The LifeBook 990Tx notebook from Fujitsu PC  
P O I N T  
2
The point icon highlights information  
that will enhance your understanding of  
the subject material.  
Corporation is a powerful notebook computer.  
It is powered by an Intel® Pentium® II micro-  
processor, has a built-in color display, a  
CD-ROM drive,a 3.5" floppy disk drive and  
brings the computing power of desktop personal  
computers (PCs) to a portable environment.  
Messages displayed by the LifeBook 900 Series  
appear in Couriertype.  
Example: Shutdown the computer?  
C A U T I O N  
Keyboard keys are shown in boldface  
Helvetica type.  
Example: Fn, F1, Esc, and Ctrl.  
The caution icon highlights information  
that is important to your safety, to the  
safe operation of your computer, or to  
the integrity of your files. Please read all  
caution information carefully.  
This manual explains how to operate your  
LifeBook 900 Series’ hardware and built-in  
system software. The LifeBook 900 Series is  
compatible with the IBM PC AT. It comes with  
Windows® 95 pre-installed.  
Pages with additional information about a spe-  
cific topic are cross-referenced within the text.  
Example: (See page xx.)  
The LifeBook 900 Series is a completely self-  
contained unit with an active-matrix (TFT)  
color LCD display. It has a powerful interface  
that enables it to support a variety of optional  
features. (Figure P-1.)  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s u  
Figure P-1 LifeBook 900 Series With  
Both Fujitsu and Third Party Options  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S e c t i o n  
O n e  
Setting Up Your LifeBook 900 Series  
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Overview of LifeBook 900  
Series Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Top and Front Components . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Left-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Right-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . 7  
Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Bottom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Starting Your LifeBook for the First Time . . . 12  
User Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Learning About Your Operating  
System and Application Software . . . . . 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
O
n
e
Modular 3.5" floppy disk drive  
(already installed in Multi-function Bay 1  
of your notebook).  
SECTION ONE  
SETTING UP YOUR LIFEBOOK  
900 SERIES FROM FUJITSU  
This section describes how to set up your  
LifeBook 900 Series from Fujitsu. We strongly  
recommend that you read on before using your  
notebook – even if you are already familiar with  
notebook computers.  
MIDI/joystick cable  
(located in the accessories box).  
RJ-11 cable (located in the accessories box).  
Getting Started Guide.  
User’s Guide.  
UNPACKING  
Figure 1-1 LifeBook 900 Series Notebook  
When you receive your notebook, unpack it  
carefully, and compare the parts you have  
received with the items listed below.  
Microsoft Windows 95 Manual.  
Registration card and customer  
information pack.  
For a standard configuration you should have:  
LANdesk Client Manager 3.2 CD-ROM.  
LifeBook 900 Series from Fujitsu. (Figure 1-1.)  
Recovery CD-ROM  
(located in the accessories box).  
AC adapter with AC power cord  
(located in the accessories box). (Figure 1-2.)  
Additional equipment and/or  
documentation depending on the option  
package you have purchased.  
Lithium ion battery (already installed in the  
Battery bay of your notebook).  
Modular 24-speed maximum CD-ROM drive  
(already installed in Multi-function Bay 2 of  
your notebook).  
Figure 1-2 AC Adapter Unit  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r o m F u j i t s u  
S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Once you have checked and confirmed that your  
notebook system is complete, connect the AC  
adapter and follow the instructions starting on  
page 12 to begin using your LifeBook 900 Series.  
When you have completed the setup process  
please register your notebook. (See page 15.)  
Lithium ion battery.  
C A U T I O N  
Dual Multi-function bays which support  
the following:  
Your internal modem is designed to  
allow faster downloads from K56flex  
compliant digital sources. Maximum  
achievable download transmission rates  
may not reach 56 Kbps and will vary  
with line conditions.  
3.5" floppy disk drive  
(for Multi-function Bay 1 only) (included).  
24-speed maximum CD-ROM drive  
(for Multi-function Bay 2 only) (included).  
OVERVIEW OF LIFEBOOK  
990Tx FEATURES  
2
The LifeBook 990Tx is a compact, yet  
2
Optional second Lithium ion battery  
(for use in Multi-function Bay 1).  
Full audio and video features:  
powerful notebook computer available  
with standard features including:  
(See Appendix A, pages 176–180, for detailed  
information on individual models.)  
16-bit SoundBlaster-compatible  
Optional second 3.0GB hard drive  
(for Multi-function Bay 2 only).  
sound chip.  
3D-Stereo for multiple speaker effect.  
AGP graphics for fast graphics rendering.  
MPEG-1 support for full motion video.  
Zoomed Video support for full motion  
video acceleration.  
Optional DVD drive  
(for Multi-function Bay 2 only).  
266MHz Intel Pentium II processor.  
32MB SDRAM with ECC standard,  
Internal K56flex fax/data/voice modem with  
built-in telephony and DSVD support.  
expandable to 160MB.  
Built-in stereo speakers.  
AGP Graphics Acceleration.  
Built-in mono microphone.  
Stereo line in jack.  
C A U T I O N  
13.3" active-matrix (TFT) color display  
with 1024 x 768 resolution (XGA).  
Headphone jack.  
Microphone jack.  
TV input/output (NTSC/PAL  
and S-Video) jacks.  
The internal modem on all notebooks  
distributed by Fujitsu PC Corporation  
are not intended for use with the public  
telephone networks outside the United  
States and Canada.  
4MB SGRAM video RAM.  
Built-in 5GB hard drive.  
MIDI/joystick port.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
O
n
e
Two Type II/one Type III PC Card slots.  
PC-Doctor for system diagnostics.  
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION  
For detailed specifications refer to Appendix A  
on pages 176–180.  
SoftPEG from CompCore,an MPEG-1  
video player.  
Fast IrDA (4Mbps) compatible infrared port  
for wireless data transfer.  
McAfee VirusScan for virus protection.  
ATI Player for video capture and playback.  
TOP AND FRONT COMPONENTS  
Display Panel Latch  
This latch locks and releases the display panel.  
(Figure 1-4.) When the display panel is released  
it pops up slightly to make it easier to open.  
Integrated ErgoTrac pointing device for  
superb comfort and cursor control.  
External monitor support with simultaneous  
display capabilities.  
ESS AudioRack for audio CD and other  
audio controls.  
Full-size keyboard with three dedicated  
Windows 95 keys.  
MegaPhone for telephone applications  
including fax,dialing, and speakerphone.  
Display Panel  
This is a color LCD panel with back lighting for  
the display of text and graphics. (Figure 1-4.)  
Standard user-install software:  
Two PS/2 ports with hot swap connection for  
an external keyboard and an external mouse.  
AT&T WorldNet Service.  
Built-in Microphone  
The built-in microphone allows mono audio  
input to your notebook. (Figure 1-4.)  
Dual USB device support.  
AOL 3.0.  
Standard pre-installed software:  
Netscape Communicator 4.04.  
Internet Explorer 4.01.  
JFax Telecom.  
Microsoft Windows 95 operating system.  
Brightness Control  
The brightness control adjusts the overall intensity  
of the display panel back lighting. (Figure 1-4.)  
LapLink for file transfer via modem,cable  
or infrared port.  
PowerPanel for system power management.  
Agaté Tioman ProSwap for warm-swapping  
functionality in Multi-function bays.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r o m F u j i t s u  
S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Display Panel Latch  
Microphone  
Display Panel  
Brightness Control  
Status Indicator Panel  
Left Speaker  
Keyboard  
Suspend/Resume Button  
Right Speaker  
ErgoTrac Pointing Device  
Closed Cover Switch  
Multi-function Bay 1  
Battery Bay  
Multi-function Bay 2  
Figure 1-4 LifeBook 900 Series with Display Open  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
O
n
e
Status Indicator Panel  
Multi-function Bay One  
This bay (Figure 1-4.) accommodates:  
C A U T I O N  
LCD display of the status of the power state  
and source, suspend mode,battery charge  
(battery in Multi-function Bay 1, Multi-  
function Bay 2 and in Battery bay), floppy  
disk drive activity, hard drive activity,  
Be sure you know what settings are  
active for your Suspend/Resume button  
before you use it, because misuse can  
result in data loss. (See the Power  
Savings Menu of the BIOS Setup Utility,  
pages 96–101, for more information.)  
3.5" floppy disk drive (included).  
Optional second Lithium ion battery (which  
must be purchased separately).  
CD-ROM drive activity, PC Card activity,  
CapsLock, NumLk and Scr Lk. (Figure 1-4.)  
Multi-function Bay Two  
This bay (Figure 1-4.) accommodates:  
Suspend/Resume Button  
24-speed maximum CD-ROM drive (included).  
The Suspend/Resume button allows you to sus-  
pend notebook activity without turning off the  
notebook power, and return it to an active state.  
This feature saves power, and is particularly  
useful when the notebook is running only on  
battery power. (See pages 39–47 and 96–101 for  
more information on Power Management.)  
(Figure 1-4.)  
Closed Cover Switch  
The closed cover switch turns off the LCD back  
lighting when the display panel is closed,thus  
saving power. This switch also behaves as a  
Suspend/Resume button, when the closed cover  
switch is set to Suspend/Resume in the BIOS  
Setup Utility. (See pages 102-103.) (Figure 1-4.)  
Optional second 3.0GB hard drive (which  
must be purchased separately).  
C A U T I O N  
Do not use your notebook with either of  
the Multi-function bays empty, or you  
may damage it.  
Keyboard  
Speakers  
A full-size keyboard with dedicated Windows 95  
keys for input into the notebook. (Figure 1-4.)  
The built-in dual speakers output stereo sound  
from the notebook. (Figure 1-4.)  
ErgoTrac Pointing Device  
The ErgoTrac pointing device is a joystick-like  
cursor control system with two click buttons.  
(Figure 1-4.)  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r o m F u j i t s u  
S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Theft Prevention Lock Slot  
PC Card Lock  
Port Cover  
MIDI/Joystick Port  
Headphone Jack  
Stereo Line In Jack  
Microphone Jack  
LEFT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS  
Theft Prevention Lock Slot  
This is a slot that allows you to attach a physical  
lock down device. (Figure 1-5.)  
PC Card Slot  
DC Power Jack  
PC Card 2  
Eject Button  
PC Card Slots  
The PC Card Slots allow you to install two type  
I or II PC Cards or one t ype III PC Card. (See  
pages 126–128 for more information on PC Cards.)  
The sliding button to the left of the card slots  
locks the card(s) in place, while the buttons to  
the right of the slots eject the card(s) from the  
slots. (Figure 1-5.)  
Multi-function  
Bay 1 Release  
Button  
PC Card 1  
Eject Button  
External  
Floppy Disk  
Drive Port  
Volume Control  
Dual PS/2 Ports Power Switch  
Port Cover  
Figure 1-6 LifeBook 900 Series Right-side Panel  
Figure 1-5 LifeBook 900 Series Left-side Panel  
External Floppy Disk Drive Port  
RIGHT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS  
DC Power Jack  
The DC power jack allows you to plug in the  
AC adapter or the optional auto/airline adapter.  
(Figure 1-6.)  
Battery Bay  
This bay contains the main Lithium ion battery  
for your notebook. (Figure 1-4.)  
A port for attaching an optional external  
floppy disk drive. This allows you to connect  
an optional separate floppy disk drive when  
Multi-function Bay 1 is being used for another  
purpose. (Figure 1-5.)  
C A U T I O N  
Power Switch  
This switch is the main power switch for your  
notebook. (Figure 1-6.)  
Only one optional second battery at a  
time is supported. Your notebook does not  
support three (3) batteries simultaneously.  
Multi-function Bay 1 Release Button  
This is the release to allow removal and  
installation of devices in Multi-function Bay 1.  
(Figure 1-5.)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
O
n
e
Dual PS/2 Ports  
Headphone Jack  
You can connect headphones or powered exter-  
nal speakers to the headphone jack. (Figure 1-6.)  
C A U T I O N  
These ports allow you to connect an external  
PS/2 mouse or an external PS/2 keyboard or  
numeric keypad. The PS/2 ports can be used  
interchangeably for either mouse or keyboard  
and your notebook will automatically recognize  
them. (Figure 1-6.)  
There are software volume controls. The  
knob setting and the software settings will  
interact. Software volume off will override  
the knob setting and the software volume  
setting will control the maximum knob  
setting. (See Volume Control on page 34  
for more information.)  
Volume Control  
The volume control is a knob which provides  
manual control of the sound level of all audio  
output from your notebook. (Figure 1-6.)  
MIDI/Joystick Port  
This port allows you to connect via a custom  
cable,a music synthesizer, game joystick, or other  
MIDI device to your notebook. The custom cable  
is included with your notebook. (Figure 1-6.)  
Serial Port  
RJ-11 Jack  
REAR PANEL COMPONENTS  
RJ-11 Jack  
This is the jack for attaching a telephone line to  
the internal modem. This jack can be used with  
S-Video In Port  
Docking P
Composite Video In Jack  
Microphone Jack  
Parallel Port the connector cover closed and the sliding  
The microphone jack allows you to connect an  
external mono microphone. (Figure 1-6.)  
panel in the connector cover slightly opened  
ternal  
onitor Port  
for added convenience. (Figure 1-7.)  
Stereo Line In Jack  
Slide Panel  
The stereo line in jack allows you to connect an  
external audio source to your notebook, like an  
audio cassette player. This jack will not support  
an external microphone. (Figure 1-6.)  
P O I N T  
S-Video Out Port  
If you are using TV output in simultae-  
nous display modes (TV+CRT, TV+LCD,  
or TV+CRT+LCD) the top portion of the  
screen will be cut off. For optimal TV  
ouput usage set the display mode to  
"Television" only.  
Composite  
Video Out Jack  
Infrared Port  
Connector Cover  
Dual USB Port  
Figure 1-7 LifeBook 900 Series Rear Panel  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r o m F u j i t s u  
S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Dual USB Port  
C A U T I O N  
C A U T I O N  
This port allows you to connect two Universal  
Serial Bus devices, such as external game pads,  
pointing devices, keyboards and speakers.  
(Figure 1-7.)  
The internal modem is not intended for  
use with Digital PBX systems. Do not  
connect the internal modem to a digital  
PBX as it may cause serious damage to  
the internal modem or your entire note-  
book. Consult your PBX manufacturer’s  
documentation for details. Some hotels  
have Digital PBX systems. Be sure to find  
out BEFORE you connect your modem.  
The connector cover – which closes over  
the ports on the rear of the notebook –  
can be damaged if it is left open when  
the notebook is moved around.  
Composite Video Jacks  
Thes connectors allow you to connect,and  
use directly, any TV or other video device  
which meets the American TV standard  
(NTSC) or the European TV standard (PAL).  
(Figure 1-7.)  
Parallel Port  
The parallel port allows you to connect parallel  
devices, such as a parallel printer to your note-  
book. (This is also referred to as an LPT port.)  
(Figure 1-7.)  
S-Video Connectors  
Docking Port  
Infrared Port  
These connectors allow you to connect,and use  
directly, any S-Video device, such as a VCR or  
TV. (The S-Video standard provides for a higher  
quality picture than NTSC or PAL.)  
The Docking port allows you to connect an  
optional Port Replicator or LANdock. The con-  
nector cover must be closed and the sliding  
panel fully opened to reveal the Docking port  
and the RJ-11 jack when connecting a Port  
Replicator or a LANdock. (Figure 1-7.)  
The fast IrDA (4Mbps) compatible port allows  
you to communicate with another IrDA com-  
patible infrared device without a cable. (See  
pages 47–48 for more information.) (Figure 1-7.)  
External Monitor Port  
This port allows you to connect an external  
VGA or SVGA CRT monitor. (Figure 1-7.)  
Serial Port  
The serial port allows you to connect serial  
RS-232C devices, such as serial printers or scan-  
ners. (This is also referred to as a COM port.)  
(Figure 1-7.)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
O
n
e
Docking  
Alignment  
Holes  
Battery Bay  
BOTTOM COMPONENTS  
This compartment houses your notebooks  
main battery. The battery is removable for ser-  
vice and storage purposes only. (Figure 1-8.)  
Tilt Adjustment Feet  
Multi-function  
Bay 2 Release  
Button  
These are a pair of feet which flip down and  
hold the back of your notebook approximately  
6° higher than the front when resting on a flat  
surface. They are designed to make using your  
notebook more comfortable. (Figure 1-8.)  
Adjustment F
Multi-function Bay 2 Release Button  
This is the release to allow removal and  
installation of devices in Multi-function Bay 2.  
(See pages 118–119 and Figure 1-8.)  
Unit Label  
Unit  
This label contains the model number and  
other information about your notebook. In  
addition the configuration portion of this label  
has the serial number and manufacturer infor-  
mation that you will need to give your support  
representative so that he or she can help you. It  
exactly identifies the version of various compo-  
nents of your notebook. (Figure 1-8.)  
Label  
Battery Release Button  
This is the release to allow removal and installa-  
tion of the main notebook battery. (Figure 1-8.)  
Multi-function  
Bay 1  
Eject Lever  
Memory Upgrade  
Compartment  
Multi-function Bay 1  
Battery  
Release  
Button  
This compartment is accessed from the front  
of your notebook. (See pages 117–120 and  
Figure 1-4 on page 5.)  
Battery Bay  
Multi-function Bay 1  
Figure 1-8 Bottom View  
Multi-function Bay 1 Eject Lever  
This eject device aids in removing the device in  
Multi-function Bay 1 after it has been released  
with the Multi-function Bay 1 release button on  
the left side panel of your notebook.  
(See Figures 1-5 and 1-8.)  
Memory Upgrade Compartment  
This compartment houses the optional memory  
upgrade modules which allow you to expand the  
system memory capacity of your notebook.  
(See pages 134–137 for more information on  
installing added memory capacity.) (Figure 1-8.)  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r o m F u j i t s u  
S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
To Connect the AC Adapter  
To Switch From AC Adapter Power  
To Battery Power  
1. Be sure that you have at least one charged  
battery installed.  
POWER SOURCES  
1.Plug the DC output cable of the AC adapter  
into the DC power jack on the right side  
panel of your notebook.  
Your notebook has four possible power sources:  
the main Lithium ion battery; an optional sec-  
ond Lithium ion battery; the AC adapter; and  
an optional auto/airline adapter.  
2.Plug the AC adapter into an AC  
electrical outlet.  
2. Remove the AC or auto/airline adapter.  
Connecting the Power Adapters  
The AC adapter or an optional auto/airline  
adapter provides power for operating your note-  
book and charging the batteries. (Figure 1-9.)  
To Connect an Optional Auto/airline Adapter  
1.Plug the DC output cable into the DC  
power jack on the right side panel of  
your notebook.  
C A U T I O N  
The Lithium ion battery is not charged  
when you purchase your notebook.  
Initially you will need to connect the  
AC adapter or an optional auto/airline  
adapter to use it. If you purchase a sec-  
ond Lithium ion battery it will not be  
charged when you get it. You will need to  
charge it prior to use. It can take up to 3  
hours to charge a battery if the notebook  
is Off or in Suspend mode. If your note-  
book is in use it can take up to 9 hours  
or more to charge a single battery.  
2.Plug the auto/airline adapter connector  
into the cigarette lighter of a car or other  
vehicle with the ignition key in the On or the  
Accessories position; or plug the auto/airline  
adapter connector into the power jack on the  
seat in airplanes that are equipped to support  
powered electronic devices.  
Figure 1-9 Connecting the AC Adapter  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
O
n
e
Software Data Security Features  
DATA SECURITY  
C A U T I O N  
The operating system and some applications  
have security features that are independent of  
the built-in hardware protection features that  
are controlled from the BIOS. See your software  
documentation for more information about  
these features.  
Your LifeBook 900 Series has a built-in hardware  
control password security feature that allows you  
to protect the data stored in the notebook from  
unauthorized access. Your operating system and  
some applications have software control pass-  
word security features that allow you to protect  
all or portions of the data stored in the notebook  
from unauthorized access.  
Software security feature passwords may  
not be the same as the hardware security  
passwords. Be sure you know which  
features are controlled from software  
and which from hardware or you may  
lock yourself out of your own data or  
lock up your hardware and not be able  
to operate your notebook.  
C A U T I O N  
Hardware Data Security Features  
Make sure you memorize your passwords,  
both hardware and software. If you forget,  
you may not be able to use the notebook,  
and you will have to contact your service  
provider and arrange to have them reset  
the hardware system password. Consult  
your software manuals for assistance if you  
forget your software security password(s).  
When you are using your notebook built-in  
hardware control password to gain access to the  
notebook,the actual password will not appear  
on the screen. This is a safety precaution. The  
hardware control security parameters are set  
from the BIOS setup utility. (See Security Menu  
on pages 90–95 for more information on setting  
and clearing passwords and enabling and dis-  
abling built-in security features.)  
STARTING YOUR LIFEBOOK  
FOR THE FIRST TIME  
Booting the System  
The first time that you turn on your notebook  
you will need to attach your AC adapter,  
because the battery is not charged when you  
get your machine. We strongly recommend that  
you do not attach any other external devices,  
and do not put any CDs or floppy disks in your  
drives until you have gone through the initial  
power on sequence.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r o m F u j i t s u  
S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
When you turn on your notebook for the first  
time it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen.  
If you do nothing the system will read the hard  
drive for the operating system software, flash  
the notebook configuration information on the  
screen,and display the Windows 95 Setup  
Wizard Screen. (See Power On, page 23, for  
additional help.) You will then be stepped  
through the condition of use process. You must  
complete this initial process before you will  
be able to use your notebook.(If you wish  
to access the BIOS setup utility before you  
go through the condition of use process you  
Conditions of Use  
User Information  
The first time you start your notebook you  
must confirm your acceptance of the copyright  
limitations for your pre-installed software. After  
you complete the Condition of Use process  
these screens will not appear again. There are  
six (6) screens to read carefully and respond to.  
Fill in your name and the company name as you  
want the software to be licensed. To step from  
the name blank to the company blank press  
the  
key. When the information has been  
entered click the Next> button. You will not  
be allowed to continue until you make an entry.  
You cannot use your notebook until this  
Condition of Use process is completed. The  
bottom of each screen has a <Back button, a  
Next> button and a Cancelbutton which  
are activated by clicking the integrated ErgoTrac  
pointing device button with the cursor on the  
screen button. The <Back button will return  
you to the previous screen. The Next> button  
activates any choices or information you have  
entered and takes you to the next screen.  
The Cancel button allows you to stop the  
setup process.  
License Agreement  
Read the agreement carefully. You can scroll  
through the text using the integrated ErgoTrac,  
pointing device to activate the scroll bar or use  
the up arrow Õ and down arrow Ô keys to  
move up and down the text one line at a time,  
must press the  
still visible. If you press the  
key while the Fujitsu logo is  
key while the  
or use the  
and  
keys to  
move the text one screen at a time. When  
you finish reading you must point and click to  
accept or reject the terms of the agreement and  
then click the Next> button.  
Fujitsu logo is still present you will get a dialog  
box which will allow you to select which drive  
is to be used for finding the operating system.)  
If you turn off the power without using the on  
screen Cancel button you will get an error  
message when you start your notebook again.  
If you stop the process before the setup is com-  
plete your notebook will startup at the begin-  
ning of the Windows 95 Setup Wizard. The  
setup screens and your needed responses are  
described in the following pages.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
O
n
e
on the Finishbutton the display will flash  
various screens as the system identifies what  
hardware is installed and runs a virus check.  
Windows 95 Setup  
P O I N T  
Once you have completed the printer setup, or  
chosen not to set up a printer at this time, you  
will see the Windows 95 Setup screen. This  
screen lets you set up Internet Explorer 4.01  
with Active Desktop on your LifeBook.  
Follow the on-screen directions to complete  
the installation of Internet Explorer 4.01.  
If you reject the terms of the license  
agreement you will be asked to review  
the license agreement for information on  
returning Windows 95 or to shut down  
your notebook.  
Time Zone  
When your notebook has completely identified  
all of the installed hardware it will display a dia-  
log box for entering which time zone you wish  
to set in the BIOS clock.  
Certificate of Authenticity  
Windows Messaging  
P O I N T  
Look in the box that your notebook came in  
and you will find a Windows 95 Certificate of  
Authenticity shrink wrapped with the Windows  
95 Users manual.On the certificate you will  
find a bar-code with a number above it. This is  
your product code and the number you should  
enter on the Certificate of Authenticity screen.  
When you have entered the number exactly as  
shown, click the Next> button.  
Once you have selected a time zone you will see  
a screen announcing that Windows messaging  
is being set up.  
If you would like to skip the installation  
of Internet Explorer 4.01, go the the Start  
Menu on the desktop, select Shutdown  
and Restart the computer. After returning  
to Windows, you can install Internet  
Explorer 4.01 at any time by selecting  
the icon Setup for Internet Explorer 4.0  
in the Internet Starts Here folder  
Printer Setup  
When the messaging setup is complete a dialog  
box will appear for selecting which printer is  
to be attached to your notebook. You do not  
have to select a printer at this time. If you do  
not wish to select a printer, click on the  
Cancel button. If you do wish to select a  
printer click on the Next> button and answer  
the questions.  
on the desktop.  
Start Wizard  
The Start Wizard screen will appear if you have  
entered a valid product code. When you click  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r o m F u j i t s u  
S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
USER REGISTRATION  
There are three ways to register your notebook.  
Manuals  
P O I N T  
In the accessories box you will find manuals for  
Windows 95 and other pre-installed software.  
Software manuals of pre-installed software that  
are not in the accessories box are available on-  
line. See the help screens of your pre-installed  
software. We recommend that you review these  
manuals for general information on the use of  
these applications and to get a basic under-  
standing of what is covered in the manual,and  
how it is organized,should questions arise as  
you use the applications.  
You will find a Recovery CD-ROM packet  
in your accessories box. Please store the  
packet in a safe place in case there is a  
loss of data and it becomes necessary to  
re-install your operating system and/or  
application programs. (See Restoring Your  
Pre-installed Software from the Recovery  
CD-ROM on page 169.)  
1. The registration card provided in the box  
with your LifeBook 900 Series which can be  
filled out and mailed.  
2.A registration form behind the Fujitsu  
Welcome Center icon which can be filled out  
on your notebook and sent in a variety of  
ways, including printing and mailing, faxing  
or e-mailing.  
3. Telephone registration by calling the  
Fujitsu PC service and support line at  
1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487).  
LEARNING ABOUT YOUR  
OPERATING SYSTEM AND  
APPLICATION SOFTWARE  
Tutorials  
All operating systems and most application  
software have tutorials built-in. We highly rec-  
ommend that you step through your tutorial  
before you use an application even if you are  
familiar with the same application on a differ-  
ent machine,an earlier version of the applica-  
tion, or a similar product.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S e c t i o n  
T w o  
Using Your LifeBook 900 Series from Fujitsu  
Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Keyboard Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Status Indicator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Restarting The System . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Fujitsu Welcome Center . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Integrated ErgoTrac Pointing Device . . . . . 29  
Using The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Volume Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Floppy Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
CD-ROM Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Infrared Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Pre-Installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
Adjusting the Display Panel  
SECTION TWO  
When you turn on your notebook, you may  
want to adjust the brightness level of the screen  
for best visibility. To do this, adjust the bright-  
ness control slider at the bottom of the display  
panel. (Figure 2-2.) You may need to adjust  
the brightness periodically for different  
operating environments.  
USING YOUR LIFEBOOK  
900 SERIES FROM FUJITSU  
This section describes the indicators, buttons,  
connections and operating modes of your  
LifeBook 900 Series and their use.  
DISPLAY PANEL  
Opening the Display Panel  
Lifting the latch releases the top of the display  
panel from the front of the notebook body.  
When the display panel is released it pops up  
slightly to make it easier to open.Lift the dis-  
play panel backward until the screen is at a  
comfortable viewing angle. (Figure 2-1.)  
P O I N T  
The higher the brightness level, the more  
power the notebook will consume and  
the faster your batteries will discharge.  
For maximum battery life, make sure that  
the brightness is set as low as possible  
(control slider all the way to the left).  
Brightness  
Control  
Figure 2-2 Display Adjustments  
They are designed to make keyboard operation  
more comfortable. The feet must be folded flat  
against the bottom of the notebook when open-  
ing or using the CD-ROM drive or it will not  
open or operate properly.  
KEYBOARD ANGLE  
On the bottom of your notebook,near the  
back,are a pair of feet which flip down and  
hold the back of your notebook about 6° higher  
than the front when resting on a flat surface.  
(Figure 1-8 on page 10.)  
Figure 2-1 Opening the Display Panel  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
STATUS INDICATOR PANEL  
C A U T I O N  
The Status Indicator panel is located in the  
recess just above the keyboard. (Figure 2-3.)  
The appropriate indicators become visible as  
you use your notebook.  
Do not operate your CD-ROM drive or  
attempt to open the tray unless your  
notebook is sitting on a flat surface and  
the adjustment feet are folded against  
the bottom of the notebook. Using a  
CD-ROM drive when it is not level may  
damage the drive or prevent  
Power Indicator  
The Power indicator tells you when the system  
is operational. It is on steady when there is  
power to your notebook,and blinks when the  
system is in Suspend mode. It goes off when  
the system has entered Save-to-Disk mode,has  
entered the Windows 95 pseudo-off state, or the  
power is turned off from the power switch.  
proper operation.  
C A U T I O N  
When you are not using the adjustment  
feet be sure that they are folded flat  
against the bottom of the notebook.  
They could be broken off or injure  
someone if not used properly.  
Figure 2-3 Status Indicator Panel  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
indicator is On when either of the adapters is  
active and Off when power comes from the bat-  
teries alone. If a battery is charging, the Power  
Adapter indicator is active regardless of the  
setting of the power switch. The AC Adapter  
indicator is also active in the Windows 95  
pseudo-off state, regardless of the battery status.  
If there is no battery charging, and the power  
switch is Off,then the AC Adapter indicator  
and the Battery indicators will all be off.  
A small arrow icon (Battery Charging indica-  
tor) appears to the left of each of the Battery  
Level indicators and above the number (Battery  
identifier) if that battery is charging. The  
Battery Charging indicator flashes if the battery  
is too hot or too cold to charge. (Figure 2-3.)  
The Battery Charging indicators operate  
whether the power switch is Off or On.  
P O I N T  
When your notebook has been shut down  
from Windows 95, it is not in the same  
condition as it is when it is turned off from  
the power switch. It is in a pseudo-off  
state, with all applications closed, but  
it can be turned on by pressing the  
Suspend/Resume button. It is drawing  
some current in the pseudo-off state.  
The symbols inside the battery outline of the  
Battery Level indicator show the operating level  
available in that battery. (Figure 2-4.) If there is  
no battery charging and the power switch is Off,  
the AC Adapter indicator and the Battery indi-  
cators will all be off.  
Battery Indicators  
The two sets of battery indicators show whether  
or not the main Lithium ion battery and/or  
the optional second Lithium ion battery are  
installed, and indicate the condition of each.  
(Figure 2-3.) Battery 1 is the main Lithium ion  
battery which is installed in the Battery Bay  
and Battery 2 is an optional second Lithium  
ion battery which may be installed in Multi-  
function Bay 2 only. The battery indicators are  
displayed only for a battery which is installed.  
C A U T I O N  
Your notebook must be turned off  
with the power switch to prevent all  
current draw.  
AC Adapter Indicator  
The AC Adapter indicator tells you whether the  
system is operating on an AC or auto/airline  
adapter, or is running on batteries alone. The  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
CD-ROM Drive Access Indicator  
C A U T I O N  
76% – 100%  
51% – 75%  
The CD-ROM Drive Access indicator tells you  
the CD-ROM Drive is being accessed. The  
CD-ROM Drive Access indicator will flash  
when the software tries to access an audio CD  
or a CD-ROM, even if no drive is installed.  
A shorted battery is damaged and must  
be replaced. (Figure 2-4.)  
26% – 50%  
C A U T I O N  
P O I N T  
Turning off the power with the power  
switch or using the Suspend/Resume  
button when any of the Access indicators  
are On may cause loss of data and/or  
system errors.  
13% – 25%  
The Windows 95 CD automatic insertion  
function will periodically check for a disk  
installed in the drive, causing the CD-ROM  
Drive Access indicator to flash. The CD  
automatic insertion function allows your  
system to automatically start a disk as  
soon as it is inserted in the drive and  
the tray is closed. It will begin playing an  
audio CD disk, or will start an application  
if the disk has an auto run file on it.  
Low Warning £ 12%  
Dead Battery  
C A U T I O N  
Shorted Battery  
Batteries should not be subjected to  
shocks, vibration or extreme temperature  
as these conditions can cause permanent  
damage.  
Figure 2-4 Battery Level Indicator  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
8. Click on the CD-ROM drive or DVD drive  
manufacturers name and model.  
P O I N T  
P O I N T  
If you do not wish to have the CD  
automatic insertion function active you  
can disable it.  
The Hard Drive Access indicator does not  
show which drive is being accessed. It  
works the same for either the internal  
hard drive or the optional second  
hard drive.  
9. Click on Properties. The CD-ROM drive or  
DVD drive manufacturers name and model  
properties dialogue box will be displayed.  
10.Click on the Settings tab.  
To disable the CD automatic insertion function  
do as follows:  
11. Click on the automatic insertion notification  
box to toggle it off.  
Floppy Disk Drive Access Indicator  
The Floppy Disk Drive Access indicator tells  
you a floppy disk drive is being accessed,  
regardless of whether a drive is installed in  
Multi-function Bay 1or on the external floppy  
disk drive port. The Floppy Disk Drive Access  
indicator will flash when your software tries to  
access a floppy disk drive even if no floppy disk  
drive is installed.  
1. Save all data and close all applications.  
2. Click on the Start button.  
3. Point to Settings.  
12. Click on OK.  
13. Click on OK in the system properties  
dialogue box.  
4. Click on the Control Panel. The control panel  
window will be displayed.  
14. Restart your notebook according to the  
message displayed.  
5. Double click on the System icon. The system  
properties dialogue box will be displayed.  
You can re-enable the function by repeating  
the process except in step 11 change the  
setting to On.  
PC Card Access Indicators  
6. Click on the Device Manager tab. The device  
list will be displayed.  
The PC Card Access indicators tell you when an  
installed PC Card is being accessed. Card 1 is  
the bottom connector inside the slot and Card  
2 is the upper connector inside the card slot.  
Hard Drive Access Indicator  
7. Click on the + to the left of the CD-ROM  
icon. The CD-ROM drive or DVD drive  
manufacturers name and model  
will be displayed.  
The Hard Drive Access indicator tells you when  
either the internal hard drive or the optional  
second hard drive is being accessed.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Type III cards are always Card 1 only. The  
PC Card Access indicator will flash if your  
software tries to access a PC Card even if  
none are installed.  
Scr Lk Indicator  
POWER ON  
The Scr Lk indicator tells you when you  
are in scroll lock mode. You can activate or  
deactivate the scroll lock mode by pressing  
the Scr Lk/NumLk key. Deactivate the mode  
the same way you activated it.  
Facing the keyboard and display panel, move  
the power switch towards the rear of your note-  
book. This is the On position. (Figure 2-5.)  
When you are done working you can leave your  
notebook in Suspend mode, (see pages 44 and  
96), or you can turn it off. The power switch  
moved toward the front of your notebook is in  
the Off position. (See the section Power Off, page  
24, for the recommended shutoff procedures.)  
NumLk Indicator  
The NumLk indicator tells you the internal key-  
board is set in ten-key numeric mode. (See page  
32 for more information on the numeric keypad.)  
You can activate the NumLk mode by pressing  
the Scr Lk/NumLk key while holding down the  
Shift key. Deactivate the mode the same way  
you activated it.  
On  
C A U T I O N  
After turning off your notebook, make  
sure that it has been Off at least 10  
seconds before turning the power switch  
to On. If you do not you could cause a  
system error. When you turn on your  
notebook be sure you have a power  
source. This means that at least one  
battery is installed and charged, or  
that the AC adapter or the auto/airline  
adapter is connected and has power.  
CapsLock Indicator  
The CapsLock indicator tells you when the key-  
board is set for all capital letters. Activate the  
capitals lock mode by pressing the CapsLock  
key on the keyboard. Deactivate the mode the  
same way you activated it.  
Off  
Figure 2-5 Power Switch  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
Depending on the nature of the problem you  
may be able to continue by starting the operat-  
ing system or by entering the setup utility and  
revising the settings.  
POWER OFF  
C A U T I O N  
Before turning off the power by putting the  
power switch in the Off position, check that the  
Hard Drive,CD-ROM Drive,PC Card and the  
Floppy Disk Drive Access indicators are all Off.  
(See Figure 2-3, page 19.) If you turn off the  
power while accessing a disk or PC Card there  
is a risk of loss of data. The Off position is  
reached by facing the keyboard and display  
panel,and moving the switch toward the front  
of your notebook. To assure that your notebook  
shuts down without error, use the Windows 95  
shut down procedure.  
Do not carry your notebook around  
with the power on or subject it to shocks  
or vibration, as you risk damaging  
your notebook.  
After satisfactory completion of the PowerOn  
Self Test (POST) your notebook will load  
your operating system. (See Boot Menu on  
pages 104–107 to see which kind of disk will be  
the source.)  
C A U T I O N  
The main Lithium ion battery is not  
charged when you purchase your note-  
book. Initially you will need to connect  
the AC adapter to use it. If you purchase  
an optional second Lithium ion battery, it  
will not be charged when you get it, you  
will need to charge it prior to use.  
C A U T I O N  
Never turn off your notebook during  
Power On Self Test (POST) or it will  
cause an error message to be displayed  
when you turn your notebook on the  
next time. (See the Troubleshooting  
information on pages 146-148.)  
C A U T I O N  
Never turn your notebook off while an  
application is running. Be sure to close all  
files, exit all applications and shut down  
your operating system prior to turning  
off the power with the power switch. If  
files are open when you turn the power  
off, you will lose any changes that  
have not been saved, and may  
When the power switch is turned on, your  
notebook carries out a Power On Self Test  
(POST) to check the internal parts and config-  
uration. If a fault is found a beep will sound  
and/or an error message will be displayed.  
(See Troubleshooting on pages 146–148)  
cause disk errors.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Shutting down your notebook from Windows  
95 lets your notebook shut down operations,  
and turn off power in the proper sequence to  
prevent errors. The sequence is:  
NOTE: You may also select Shut down the  
computer? and once the power is off for 10  
seconds or more you can restart your notebook  
with the Suspend/Resume button. You may also  
select Shut down the computer?and  
once the power is off turn the power switch to  
Off for 10 seconds or more and then turn the  
power switch to On. These alternative methods  
are not recommended.  
P O I N T  
When your notebook has been shut  
down from Windows 95, it is not the  
same as being turned off from the power  
switch. It is in a pseudo-off state, with all  
applications closed, but can and must be  
turned on by pressing the Suspend/  
Resume button. It is drawing some  
current in the pseudo-off state.  
1.Go to the Start button menu.  
2. Click on ShutDown.  
3. Verify that Shut down the computer?  
is selected and click on Yes.  
If you are going to store your notebook for a  
month or more,take the following precautions:  
P O I N T  
RESTARTING THE SYSTEM  
In Windows 95 pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Del  
keys simultaneously triggers the  
ShutDown submenu of the Start menu.  
When you wish to restart your system be sure  
that you follow the proper procedure. The pro-  
cedure is as follows:  
1. Remove any CD and/or floppy disk.  
2. After shutting down with Windows 95 turn  
off your notebook using the power switch.  
1.Go to the Start menu.  
3. Close your notebook display panel.  
4. Disconnect the AC adapter.  
2. Click on ShutDown.  
3. Click on Restart the computer?  
5. Remove the batteries and store them  
separately in a cool dry place.  
4. Verify that Restart the computer?  
is selected and click on Yes.  
Windows 95 will shutdown and restart your  
notebook.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
When using a high current device such as a  
modem,a LAN card, the CD-ROM drive, or  
the hard drive frequently.  
BATTERIES  
C A U T I O N  
The Lithium ion battery is rechargeable with an  
operating time of up to 1.5 hours, depending  
on active power management features and user  
activity levels. Your notebook can be operated  
on the main Lithium ion battery alone or in  
a dual battery configuration with an optional  
second Lithium ion battery.  
Turning off the power switch without  
exiting Windows 95 may cause an error  
when you start the next time. Turning  
the power to On when it has been Off  
for less than 10 seconds may also cause  
an error when you start the next time.  
Using the AC adapter will conserve your  
battery when using a high current device such  
as a modem,a LAN card,the CD-ROM drive,  
the hard drive, or the optional second hard  
drive frequently.  
The Lithium ion battery operating time may  
become shorter than the reference value if it is  
used under the following conditions:  
FUJITSU WELCOME CENTER  
C A U T I O N  
The Fujitsu Welcome Center is an icon on  
your Windows 95 desktop. Clicking on it gives  
you access to product registration forms and  
instructions, change of address information  
and forms, contact information including  
telephone numbers and e-mail addresses,and an  
accessory catalog with the information for order-  
ing accessories for your notebook. Double left-  
click on the icon and then on the appropriate  
button for the information selection you wish.  
Actual battery life will vary based  
on screen brightness, applications,  
features, power management settings,  
batterycondition, and other customer  
preferences. CD-ROM drive, hard drive,  
optional second hard drive or usage may  
also have a significant impact on  
battery life.  
When used at temperatures that exceed a  
low of 5°C or a high of 35°C. High temper-  
atures not only reduce charging efficiency,  
but can also cause battery deterioration.  
(The Charging icon on the Status Indicator  
panel will flash when you try to charge  
a battery that is outside its operating  
temperature range.)  
The battery charging capacity is reduced as  
the battery ages. If your battery is running  
low quickly, you should replace it with  
a new one.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
The Lithium ion batteries are recharged inter-  
nally using the AC adapter or auto/airline  
adapter. To recharge the batteries:  
Shorted Batteries  
C A U T I O N  
If your Status Indicator panel shows a shorted  
battery, check the installation for that battery by  
removing and re-installing it. If it still shows  
that it is shorted, replace it with a new battery.  
Do not leave a faulty battery in your  
notebook. It might damage your AC  
adapter, optional auto/airline adapter,  
another battery, or your notebook itself.  
It may also prevent operation of your  
notebook by draining all available current  
into the bad battery.  
Make sure the main battery to be charged is  
installed in the Battery bay and any optional  
second battery is installed in Multi-function  
Bay 2 of your notebook,then connect the AC  
adapter or auto/airline adapter.  
C A U T I O N  
A shorted battery is damaged and must  
be replaced so that it does not damage  
anything else.  
Make sure that the Battery Charging indica-  
tor to the left of the Battery Level indicator of  
the battery to be charged is visible on the  
Status Indicator panel.  
C A U T I O N  
Recharging the Batteries  
Under federal, state or local law it may  
be illegal to dispose of batteries by  
putting them in the trash. Please take  
care of our environment and dispose  
of batteries properly. Check with your  
local government authority for details  
regarding recycling or disposing of  
old batteries. If you cannot find this  
information elsewhere, contact your  
support representative at 1-800-  
8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487).  
If you want to check the condition of either the  
main Lithium ion battery or an optional second  
Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level  
indicators located on the Status Indicator panel.  
These indicators change as the battery levels  
change. Battery 1 is the main Lithium ion  
battery and Battery 2 is an optional second  
Lithium ion battery which is installed in Multi-  
function Bay 2 only. (Figure 2-3 on page 19.)  
You can also check the PowerPanel toolbar.  
(See pages 41–44.)  
The percentage charge is shown inside the  
Battery Level icon. (Figure 2-4 on page 21.)  
When two Lithium ion batteries are installed,  
the charge/discharge rate of the main and  
optional second Lithium ion batteries are the  
same,as they are connected in parallel and are  
both charging and/or discharging at the same  
time. Since the rates are the same, one may fin-  
ish charging or discharging before the other if  
they were not at the same charge level when  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
they were installed and/or the AC or auto/  
airline adapter was connected.  
C A U T I O N  
C A U T I O N  
Using heavy current devices such as LAN  
cards or frequent CD-ROM accesses may  
prevent charging completely.  
You may not be able to hear the audio  
alarms if the volume control is set too  
low or is turned off by either hardware or  
software but you will still be able to see  
the Battery Level indicator(s) flash.  
There is no memory effect on the Lithium ion  
batteries, which means that you do not need to  
discharge them completely before recharging. A  
single fully discharged Lithium ion battery will  
charge in approximately three (3) hours when  
your notebook is Off or in Suspend mode. The  
charging time from fully discharged for two  
Lithium ion batteries together, is approximately  
5 hours when your notebook is Off or in  
Suspend mode.Of course partially charged bat-  
teries will not take as long to charge. The charge  
times will be significantly longer if your note-  
book is in use while the batteries are charging  
(from approximately nine (9) hours for one  
battery to approximately 15 hours for two  
batteries with normal operating levels).  
Low Battery State  
When the battery is running low, your note-  
book beeps about every 15 seconds and the  
Battery Level indicator(s) flash. If you do not  
respond to the low battery alarm,the batteries  
will continue to discharge until they are too low  
to operate. When this happens there will be a  
multiple beep alarm,the Battery Level indicator  
will show dead battery, and your notebook will  
go into Suspend mode to try and protect your  
data as long as possible. Your power manage-  
ment settings do not affect whether the dead  
battery alarm level will send your notebook into  
Suspend mode, it will not go to Save-to-Disk  
mode. (Figure 2-3 on page 19.)  
When the low battery alarm occurs you need to  
save all your active data and put your notebook  
into Suspend mode until you can provide a new  
power source. You should provide this power as  
soon as possible. The new power source can be  
a charged battery or a power adapter, either AC  
or auto/airline.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
not provided promptly, the Power indicator will  
stop flashing and go out,and you will have lost  
the data that was not stored.  
Cursor  
C A U T I O N  
When you are in Suspend mode there  
must always be at least one power  
source active. If you turn off the power  
with the power switch, or remove all  
power sources, battery, AC adapter, or  
auto/airline adapter, while your notebook  
is in Suspend mode any data which has  
not been saved to the hard drive  
will be lost.  
Cursor  
Control  
Once you provide power you can continue to  
use your notebook while an adapter is charging  
the battery, but the battery trickle charges  
under these conditions. If you want to charge  
the battery more quickly, put your notebook  
into Suspend mode, or turn off your notebook,  
while the adapter is charging the battery. (See  
Power Off on pages 24–26 for shutdown procedures.)  
Rock gently  
with finger for  
best results  
Once your notebook goes into Dead Battery  
Suspend mode you will be unable to resume  
operation until you provide a source of  
Left  
Button  
C A U T I O N  
Right Button  
There is no guarantee that data will not  
be lost once your notebook enters the  
Dead Battery Suspend mode.  
Figure 2-6 ErgoTrac Pointing Device  
power either from an AC adapter, an optional  
auto/airline adapter, or a charged battery. Dead  
Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status  
indicator just like the normal Suspend mode.  
Once you have provided power, you will need  
to press the Suspend/Resume button to resume  
operation. In Suspend mode, your data can be  
maintained for sometime. If a power source is  
INTEGRATED ERGOTRAC  
POINTING DEVICE  
The ErgoTrac pointing device is composed  
of a short, comfortable,dish-shaped pointing  
device and two buttons located in front of the  
keyboard. The ErgoTrac pointing device has  
the function of a mouse,and moves the cursor  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
Left Double Click  
around on the screen – up, down,left and right.  
A light pressure with the tip of your finger is all  
that is required to operate the ErgoTrac. The  
more pressure you use the faster the cursor will  
move. The second part of the ErgoTrac pointing  
device – the buttons – function as mouse but-  
tons, and the functions they perform depend  
on the application you are running. Figure 2-6  
shows the position of the ErgoTrac pointing  
device and buttons.  
Double-Clicking  
Left Click  
Double-clicking means following the preceding  
Clicking procedure, but pressing the pointing  
device button twice in rapid succession.  
Double-clicking works with either the left  
or the right button.  
C A U T I O N  
If the interval between clicks is too long,  
the double-click will not be executed.  
Figure 2-7 Clicking  
P O I N T  
Clicking  
An external mouse can be connected to  
either of the PS/2 ports on the right side  
of the notebook, and used at the same  
time as the ErgoTrac pointing device.  
Clicking means pushing and releasing a button.  
To left-click move the screen cursor to the item  
you wish to select, press the left pointing device  
button once,and then immediately release it.  
To right-click,move the mouse cursor to the  
item you wish to select, press the right pointing  
device button once,and then immediately  
release it. (Figure 2-7.)  
P O I N T  
The interval between presses for  
double clicking, and other parameters of  
pointing and selecting, can be adjusted  
with the selections in the dialog box  
of the mouse icon in your Windows  
Control panel.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
ErgoTrac Pointing Device  
Control Adjustment  
General – This allows you to choose the type  
of mouse being used. It is already set for your  
integrated ErgoTrac. You may need to change  
it for an external mouse.  
The Windows Control Panel provides  
customization of your ErgoTrac pointing  
device from the mouse icon. There are four (4)  
aspects of the ErgoTrac pointing device  
operation which you can adjust.  
You may want to try practicing with different  
adjustments until you find a combination that  
is comfortable for you.  
Buttons – This lets you set up the buttons for  
Figure 2-8 Dragging  
right or left handed operation and set the  
time interval for double clicking.  
Dragging  
Pointers – This lets you set up the size and  
Dragging means selecting an item with the  
pointing cursor, and while keeping the left  
pointing device button depressed,moving the  
cursor to the desired new location,then releas-  
ing the button. (Figure 2-8.)  
shape of the cursor for different functions.  
Motion – This lets you set up the relation  
of the speed of motion of your finger to the  
motion of the cursor and to enable a t railing  
tail for the cursor arrow.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
Function keys  
keys, the function extension key (Fn) and the  
Windows 95 keys.  
Numeric KeyPad  
Certain keys on the keyboard perform dual  
functions as both standard character keys and  
as numeric keypad keys.Figure 2-9 highlights  
these keys. To switch into numeric keypad  
mode, press the Scr LkNumLk while holding  
down the Shift key. You can now enter numerals  
0 through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction  
( - ), multiplication ( * ), or division ( / ),and  
enter decimal points ( . ) using the keys desig-  
nated as ten-key functions. The keys in the  
numeric keypad are marked in the lower  
right corner of the key to indicate their  
secondary functions.  
Fn Key  
Numeric Keypad  
Application Key  
Start Key  
Cursor Keys  
To return these keys to their normal character  
function, press the Scr LkNumLk while holding  
down the Shift key again.  
Figure 2-9 Keyboard  
include Windows 95 keys and other special  
function keys. This section describes only those  
items specific to your notebook. They are the  
numeric keypad,the cursor keys,the function  
USING THE KEYBOARD  
Your notebook has an integral 86-key keyboard.  
(Figure 2-9.) The keys perform all the standard  
functions of a 101-key keyboard and also  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Pressing F10 while holding down the Fn key  
allows you to change your selection of where  
to send your display video. Each time you press  
the combination of keys you will step to the  
next choice. The choices,in order, are: built-in  
display panel only, external monitor only, or  
both built-in display panel and monitor.  
Function Keys  
P O I N T  
Your notebook has twelve function keys, F1  
through F12. The functions assigned to these  
keys differ for each application; refer to your  
software documentation to find out how these  
keys are used. (Figure 2-9.)  
When an external keypad is connected  
to the notebook the NumLk mode  
enables the external keypad and disables  
the built-in keyboard numeric keypad.  
Fn Key  
Cursor Keys  
The cursor keys are the four arrow keys on the  
keyboard which allow you to move the cursor  
Pressing the Suspend/Resume button while  
holding down the Fn key forces the Save-to-  
Disk mode to activate regardless of the BIOS  
settings. Be sure you have a Save-to-Disk  
space allocation on your hard drive before  
you do this. (For more Save-to-Disk information  
see pages 45–46 and page 101.)  
The Fn key provides extended functions for the  
notebook when used in conjunction with  
another key. (Figure 2-9.)  
up Õ, down  
Ô
, left Ó and right È as your  
Pressing F5 while holding down the Fn key  
allows you to toggle between video compensa-  
tion and no compensation. (Video compensa-  
tion controls spacing on the display. When it is  
enabled,displays with less than 1024 x 768 pixel  
resolution will still cover the entire screen.)  
application allows. (Figure 2-9.)  
P O I N T  
The integrated ErgoTrac pointing device  
and/or an external mouse are also used  
for moving the cursor around the screen.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
control settings have no effect. By the same  
token,if the ESS AudioRack has the sound  
turned off, adjusting the hardware or other  
application software volume settings will not  
produce sound. One easy operating method is  
to use the hardware and ESS AudioRack volume  
controls to set an upper limit on sound level  
and then make fine adjustments with other  
application software.  
Windows 95 Keys  
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE  
Your notebook has three Windows 95 keys, two  
Start keys and an Application key. The Start key  
displays the Start button menu. This is the same  
as the button on the toolbar which is typically  
at the bottom of your Windows 95 desktop.  
The Application key has the same function in  
Windows 95 as the right mouse button,it dis-  
plays the Shortcut menu for whatever item is  
selected. See your Windows 95 documentation  
for additional information. (Figure 2-9.)  
The modular floppy disk drive is a 3.5" drive  
which can read and write on 1.44MB and  
720KB memory capacity floppy disks. Floppy  
disk format is controlled from your operating  
system. (See your software documentation for  
more information.) The modular floppy disk  
drive fits in Multi-function Bay 1 or you can  
use the optional external floppy disk drive on  
the external floppy disk drive port.  
C A U T I O N  
The system will treat any floppy disk drive  
exactly the same way regardless of where  
the drive is installed. (For floppy disk drive  
installation and removal instructions see Multi-  
function Bays on pages 117–120 and Installing  
an Optional External Floppy Disk Drive on  
pages 121–122.) When your system boots it will  
always look first for a drive in Multi-function  
Bay 1 and then to the external floppy disk  
drive port.  
VOLUME CONTROL  
The ESS AudioRack volume setting  
sets the maximum volume level of the  
hardware volume control knob.  
All system and application functions have mul-  
tiple volume controls which interact with each  
other. There is the hardware volume control on  
the right side panel of your notebook. There is  
a volume control in the ESS AudioRack, your  
operating system Sound Control panel and any  
other application with sound.  
C A U T I O N  
If you use a speakerphone function,  
be sure that the microphone setting in  
the ESS AudioRack (recorder portion)  
is disabled.  
Each setting source puts an upper limit on the  
volume which can be set by the other sources.  
For example if the hardware volume control is  
turned all the way down, your software volume  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Loading a Floppy Disk  
Preparing a Floppy Disk for Use  
C A U T I O N  
To load,insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk  
drive,shutter side first and label up, until the  
eject button, above the floppy disk drive open-  
ing, pops out. (Figure 2-10.)  
Before you can use a new disk, you need to pre-  
pare it so your notebook knows where to store  
information. This preparation is called format-  
ting or initializing a disk. You need to format  
new 3.5" floppy disks,unless you purchase pre-  
formatted disks. You will use your notebooks  
operating system software to format a floppy  
disk.Please refer to the operating system  
manual for step-by-step instructions.  
The modular floppy disk drive can  
only be used when installed in the  
Multi-function bay. To use the external  
floppy port, the optional external floppy  
drive must be used.  
P O I N T  
When there is no floppy disk in the drive,  
the eject button is flush with the front of  
your notebook.  
C A U T I O N  
To get your system to recognize a  
newly installed floppy disk drive, restart  
your notebook.  
To prevent data stored on a floppy disk from  
being erased,slide the write protect tab on the  
floppy disk to open up the small hole. This  
makes the disk write protected. When you want  
to write data to that disk,slide the write protect  
tab the other way to close the small hole.  
(See Figure 2-11.)  
Ejecting a Floppy Disk  
To eject a disk, check that the Floppy Disk Drive  
Access indicator is Off, (see pages 19 and 22) and  
press the Eject button. (See Figure 2-10.)  
Eject Button  
C A U T I O N  
C A U T I O N  
If you eject the disk while the Floppy  
Disk Drive Access indicator is on, there is  
a risk of damaging the data on the disk  
or the disk drive.  
Formatting a previously used floppy  
disk is an effective method of clearing a  
disk as long as you realize that ALL the  
information on the disk will be erased.  
Figure 2-10 Loading/Ejecting a Floppy Disk  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
Avoid storing the floppy disk drive in loca-  
tions subject to shock and vibration.  
C A U T I O N  
Write Enabled  
Do not operate your CD-ROM drive  
unless your notebook is sitting on a flat  
surface with the adjustment feet folded  
against the bottom of the notebook.  
Using a disk when the drive is not level  
may damage the drive or prevent  
proper operation.  
Avoid using the floppy disk drive and disks  
in damp and dusty locations.  
Write Protected  
Never use the floppy disk drive with any  
liquid,metal, or foreign matter inside the  
floppy disk drive or disk.  
Never store a floppy disk near a magnet or  
magnetic field.  
To clean, wipe the floppy disk drive clean  
with a dry soft cloth or with a soft cloth  
dampened with water or a solution of neutral  
detergent. Never use benzene,paint thinner,  
or other volatile material.  
Loading a CD  
Make sure that the tilt adjustment feet on the  
bottom of the notebook are folded against  
the bottom of the notebook.  
Figure 2-11 Floppy Disk Write Protect  
Care of Floppy  
Disk Drives and Disks  
Make sure there is power provided to your  
notebook.  
Never disassemble or dismantle your floppy  
disk drive.  
Avoid storing the floppy disk drive and  
disks in extremely hot and cold locations,  
or in locations subject to severe  
temperature changes.  
Push the eject button on the front of the  
drive to open the holder tray. The tray will  
come out a short distance.  
CD-ROM DRIVE  
The CD-ROM drive is a 24-speed maximum  
reader.  
Keep the floppy disk drive and disks  
out of direct sunlight and away from  
heating equipment.  
Gently pull the tray out until a CD can be  
easily placed in the tray.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
If there was a protective sheet in the tray  
when it was shipped,make sure it has  
been removed.  
Place the CD into the tray, label side up, with  
the hole in the center of the disk snapped  
onto the raised circle in the center of the tray.  
Close the tray.  
After the disk is loaded,it will take a short  
time for your notebook to recognize it.  
P O I N T  
If you have disabled your CD automatic  
insertion function you will have to  
start the disk from your desktop, as  
your notebook will not automatically  
recognize that the disk has been loaded.  
Figure 2-12 Loading/Ejecting a CD  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
Do not bend disks or set heavy objects  
on them.  
New Hardware which will step you through  
the process of looking for your newly  
installed device.  
Never write on the label surface with a ball  
point pen, pencil or similar device.  
Formatting the Hard Drive  
The hard drive inside your notebook is format-  
ted (initialized) at the factory. You do not need  
to format it under normal circumstances. If you  
purchase an optional second hard drive you  
will need to format it the first time you use it.  
Check your operating system documentation  
for information on initializing a hard drive.  
If a disk is subjected to a sudden change from  
cold to warm, condensation may form on the  
surface. Wipe the moisture off with a clean,  
soft, lint free cloth and then let it dry at room  
temperature. DO NOT use a hair dryer or  
heater to dry a disk.  
Figure 2-13 CD Handling  
Care of CDs  
CDs are precision devices and will function  
reliably if given reasonable care.  
If a disk is dirty, use only a CD-ROM cleaner  
or wipe it with a clean,soft,lint free cloth  
starting from the inner edge and wiping to  
the outer edge.  
C A U T I O N  
Always store your disk in its case when it is  
Formatting the optional second hard drive  
after data has been stored on it will cause  
all data to be erased.  
not in use.  
HARD DRIVE  
When removing the disk from its case, press  
The internal hard drive capacity is dependent  
on which model you are using. See Appendix A  
(pages 176–180) for model information. If you  
are using the optional modular hard drive for  
the first time since you installed it, you can get  
your notebook to recognize it by opening the  
Windows 95 Control Panel and running Add  
down on the holders center while lifting out  
the disk by its edges.  
Always handle a disk by the edges and avoid  
touching the surface.  
Avoid storing any disk in extreme  
temperatures.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Internal power management for your notebook  
is controlled from settings made in the BIOS  
setup utility, the application PowerPanel by  
Phoenix Technologies,and the Windows 95  
Control Panel. If no settings have been made in  
PowerPanel or the Windows 95 Control Panel,  
the BIOS settings will be used. The PowerPanel  
and Windows 95 Control Panel options have  
been pre-set at the factory and will be active  
unless you disable them. Complete descriptions  
of the BIOS setup utility parameters are found  
in Section Three of this guide. Power manage-  
ment parameters are covered under the Power  
Savings menu. (See pages 96–101.)  
you must allocate space for the Save-  
to-Disk function if you have it enabled  
(See Setting Up Your Save-to-Disk File  
Allocation on pages 94–95 for  
more information.)  
C A U T I O N  
If you reformat the internal hard drive  
ALL information including the operating  
system, applications software and data  
will be erased. Unless data is copied to  
floppy disks or other data storage media  
it will be permanently lost. All software  
will be need to be re-installed and data  
files restored from your back-up disks.  
See the operating system manual for  
information on backing-up your data  
files. The factory installed software,  
including the operating system, can be  
restored from the Recovery CD-ROM  
which came with your notebook. It  
was in the accessories box when you  
purchased your notebook. (See Restoring  
Your Pre-installed Software from CD-ROM  
on page 149 for more information.) Any  
application software which you have  
purchased and installed will have to  
be re-installed from the original source.  
When doing a recovery remember that  
POWER MANAGEMENT  
Your LifeBook 900 Series has many features for  
conserving power. Some power saving features  
are automatic and have no user control, such  
as those for the internal modem, while others  
depend on the user setting the parameter to  
best suit their operating conditions. Power sav-  
ing features include: turning the display bright-  
ness down,limiting the use of high power  
devices, activating an appropriate power savings  
profile,and putting your notebook in Suspend  
mode when not actually performing an opera-  
tion. As with all mobile,battery-powered com-  
puters,there is a trade-off between performance  
and power savings.  
Some particular power management para-  
meters are only available for setup from one  
of these places, others can be changed in any  
one of them.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
If your notebook is suspended,pushing the  
Suspend/Resume button will return your note-  
book to active operation at the point it went  
into suspension. The Suspend/Resume button is  
located next to the Status Indicator panel above  
the keyboard of your notebook. (Figure 2-14.)  
You can tell whether or not your system is in  
Suspend mode by looking at the Power indica-  
tor. (See page 19.) If it is visible and not flash-  
ing, your notebook is fully operational. If it  
is visible and flashing, your notebook is in  
Suspend mode. If it is not visible,the power is  
Off, the power is in the Windows 95 pseudo-off  
state, or your notebook is in Save-to-Disk  
mode. When you receive your LifeBook 900  
Series it will be set to the default which is  
Suspend mode.  
C A U T I O N  
Be sure you know what settings are  
active for the Suspend/Resume button  
before you use it as misuse can result in  
data loss. (See the Power Savings Menu  
of the BIOS setup utility, pages 96–101,  
for more information.)  
Figure 2-14 Suspend/Resume Button  
P O I N T  
Using the Suspend/Resume Button  
Disabling the Suspend/Resume button  
prevents you from using the button to  
put your notebook in Suspend or Save-to-  
Disk mode. The resume function of the  
button cannot be disabled. (See the Power  
Savings Menu of the BIOS setup utility,  
pages 96–101, for more information.)  
When your notebook is active, the Suspend/  
Resume button can be used to manually put  
your notebook in Suspend mode, or in Save-to-  
Disk mode. Push the Suspend/Resume button,  
when your notebook is active but no Access  
indicators are on,and hold it in until it is  
acknowledged by activation of the selected  
mode. Which mode is activated depends on the  
settings in the BIOS setup utility Power Savings  
menu. The default is Suspend mode. (See page  
100 for how to select Save-to-Disk mode.)  
C A U T I O N  
The Suspend mode or Save-to-Disk mode  
should not be used with certain PC Cards.  
Check your PC Card documentation for  
more information.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
The profiles are groups of system settings  
designed to fit power operation to specific user  
operating conditions. The activations are short-  
cut ways to turn on specific power management  
features of your notebook. Some of the profiles  
can be edited and saved from the PowerPanel  
application, some can be edited and saved from  
the BIOS setup utility and only viewed from  
PowerPanel,and some are factory set and can  
only be viewed from either PowerPanel or the  
BIOS setup utility.  
PowerPanel  
P O I N T  
PowerPanel by Phoenix Technologies provides  
Windows 95 desktop access to a comprehensive  
combination of power management settings  
without entering the BIOS setup utility.  
If your notebook is active when you  
enter the Suspend mode or Save-to-Disk  
mode, changes to open files are not lost.  
The files are left open and memory is  
kept active during Suspend mode or the  
memory is transferred to the internal  
hard drive during Save-to-Disk mode.  
The PowerPanel icon looks like an atom with  
its cloud of electrons. This icon will open the  
PowerPanel menu. You can view the menu in  
icon format along the edge of your desktop by  
moving the cursor against the edge where you  
have chosen to keep your PowerPanel toolbar  
and letting it sit there until the toolbar appears.  
(The default position for the toolbar is the left  
side of the screen, but you can move it to  
whichever edge you like by dragging.)  
C A U T I O N  
The profile choices are:  
If you are running your notebook on  
battery power, be aware that the battery  
continues to discharge while your note-  
book is in Suspend mode, though not as  
fast as when fully operational. With a fully  
charged internal Lithium ion battery the  
Suspend mode will maintain your status  
for 24 hours or more.  
(This group is factory set.)  
Maximum Battery Life.  
Maximum Performance.  
The power management toolbar has ten power  
profile choices and six activation choices.  
When you switch to AC powered operation the  
PowerPanel toolbar will automatically change to  
indicate AC power operation and will show the  
AC Power profile as active.  
Power Management Off.  
(This one is set only from the  
BIOS setup utility.)  
Custom Settings.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
(This group is set from PowerPanel.)  
same menu to Hide the toolbar. If you hide the  
toolbar you will have to double click on the  
edge where the toolbar was located to display it.  
P O I N T  
Presentation.  
The AC Power profile is activated auto-  
matically when a power adapter is being  
used, unless it is overridden by another  
selection made after the adapter became  
active. It can be reactivated by selecting  
it or it can be activated by selection, even  
when operating only on battery power.  
Green PC.  
If you select Exit from the PowerPanel menu  
you will turn off the PowerPanel completely. To  
turn it back on, go to the Program folder of the  
Start menu,select PowerPanel and click on it.  
AC Profile.  
Word Processing.  
Communication.  
Games.  
MAXIMUM BATTERY LIFE PROFILE  
The activation choices are:  
The Maximum Battery Life profile is a factory  
installed combination of timeouts and other  
power savings parameters read directly from  
the BIOS,and chosen as the settings that will  
produce the longest possible battery life.  
POWERPANEL ONLINE HELP  
System Suspend.  
To access help with your power management  
settings, move your cursor to the PowerPanel  
toolbar and right click. (See Clicking on  
page 31.) From the menu that appears select  
PowerPanel Help Topics.  
System Save-to-Disk.  
System Standby.  
Hard Disk Standby.  
MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE PROFILE  
The Maximum Performance profile is a factory  
installed combination of timeouts and other  
power savings parameters read directly from  
the BIOS and chosen as the settings that will  
produce superior performance with reasonable  
battery life.  
Modem Power Toggle.  
POWERPANEL CUSTOMIZATION  
Video Standby.  
To modify your PowerPanel toolbar or create  
a custom toolbar, move your cursor to the  
PowerPanel toolbar and right click. From the  
menu that appears select Customize. Within the  
Customize dialog box you can choose to have  
the toolbar display at all times or to use your  
custom toolbar. You can also select from the  
The factory set Maximum Power Savings profile  
is designed around trade offs of performance  
and battery life. For maximum battery life, keep  
the display and volume levels as low as possible  
and use the custom settings recommended in  
Section Three on page 101.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
POWER MANAGEMENT OFF  
(This profile was designed to enhance the  
use of your notebook for slide show  
style presentations.)  
power savings parameters chosen as the settings  
that will produce superior performance with  
reasonable battery life when using your note-  
book with the modem active such as during  
Internet,fax or speakerphone activities.  
Turns off power management control from  
Windows 95 and PowerPanel and turns it over  
directly to the BIOS.  
GREEN PC PROFILE  
CUSTOM SETTINGS PROFILE  
The Green PC profile has the Video timeout  
and the Hard Drive timeout enabled but no  
standby or suspension modes enabled.  
The Custom Settings profile has those power  
saving parameters that you set in the BIOS  
setup utility using the Power Savings Menu  
Customize feature. (See Power Savings on  
page 101.)  
GAMES PROFILE  
The Games profile is a factory installed combi-  
nation of timeouts and other power savings  
parameters chosen as the settings that will pro-  
duce superior performance with reasonable bat-  
tery life when playing games on your notebook.  
AC PROFILE  
The AC power profile has all timeouts disabled  
and no other power management features  
enabled. This profile is activated automatically  
by plugging in a power adapter.  
P O I N T  
SYSTEM SUSPEND ACTIVATION  
Clicking on the Suspend button or selecting  
System Suspend on the PowerPanel menu will  
put your notebook in Suspend mode. Pressing  
the Suspend/Resume button turns the power  
back on and lets you begin where you left off.  
(See Figure 2-14 on page 40, and Suspend Mode  
on pages 44 and 98.)  
The Maximum Power Savings, Maximum  
Performance, and Power Management  
Off profiles are read only. The Custom  
Settings Profile can only be changed  
from the BIOS setup Utility.  
WORD PROCESSING PROFILE  
The Word Processing profile is a factory  
installed combination of timeouts and other  
power savings parameters chosen as the settings  
that will produce superior performance with  
reasonable battery life when using your note-  
book for doing word processing.  
PRESENTATION PROFILE  
The Presentation profile is the same combina-  
tion of timeouts and other power savings para-  
meters as the Maximum Battery Life profile  
except that the display is never turned off.  
SYSTEM SAVE-TO-DISK ACTIVATION  
COMMUNICATION PROFILE  
The Communication profile is a factory  
installed combination of timeouts and other  
Clicking on the Save-to-Disk button or select-  
ing System Save to Disk on the PowerPanel  
menu will put your notebook in Save-to-Disk  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
MODEM POWER TOGGLE  
mode. Your notebook will be left in the  
Pressing the Suspend/Resume button  
until acknowledged.  
Clicking on the Modem Power Toggle  
button or selecting Modem Power Toggle on  
the PowerPanel menu will turn the power to  
your modem on or off. To turn it to the other  
condition select Modem Power Toggle again.  
Windows 95 pseudo-off state. If the power  
switch is not turned off your notebook can be  
restarted by pressing the Suspend/Resume but-  
ton which will cause the system memory to  
reload from the hard drive and let you begin  
where you left off. (See Figure 2-14 on page 40,  
and Save-to-Disk Mode on pages 45-46.)  
Selecting Suspend from the Windows 95  
Start Menu.  
Selecting System Suspend from the  
PowerPanel toolbar or menu.  
VIDEO STANDBY ACTIVATION  
Timing out from lack of activity.  
Clicking on the Video Standby button or select-  
ing Video Standby on the PowerPanel menu  
turns off the power to the display. You can  
return your notebook to normal operation by  
performing any activity such as pressing a key  
or touching the ErgoTrac pointing device.  
SYSTEM STANDBY ACTIVATION  
Battery level reaching the Dead Battery  
Warning condition.  
Clicking on the System Standby button or  
selecting System Standby on the PowerPanel  
menu will put your notebook in Standby mode.  
You can return your notebook to normal opera-  
tion by performing any activity such as pressing  
a key or touching the ErgoTrac pointing device.  
Your notebooks system memory typically stores  
the file(s) on which you are working, the open  
application(s) and any other data required to  
support the operation(s) in progress. When  
you resume operation from Suspend mode, it  
returns to the point in the operation where it  
left off. You must use the Suspend/Resume  
button to resume operation,and there must  
be an adequate power source available, or  
your notebook will not resume.  
Suspend Mode  
The Suspend mode saves the contents of your  
notebooks system memory during periods of  
inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts  
while turning off the CPU, the display, the hard  
drive and all of the other internal components  
except those necessary to maintain system  
memory, recognize the Suspend/ Resume but-  
ton and restart. Your notebook can be put in  
Suspend mode by:  
HARD DISK STANDBY ACTIVATION  
Clicking on the Hard Disk Standby button or  
selecting Hard Disk Standby on the PowerPanel  
menu will turn off your internal hard drive. You  
can return your notebook to normal operation  
by performing any hard drive operation.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Time out from lack of activity with Save-To-  
Disk mode enabled from the Power Savings  
menu of the BIOS setup utility.  
C A U T I O N  
P O I N T  
Loss of all power sources, including  
batteries, while in the Suspend mode will  
cause lost data and inability to return  
to operation with the Suspend/  
Resume button.  
When PC Cards or external devices are  
in use, Save-to-Disk mode cannot return  
to the exact state prior to suspension,  
because all of the peripheral devices will  
be re-initialized when the system restarts.  
Your notebooks system memory typically stores  
the file(s) on which you are working, the open  
application(s) and any other data required to  
support the operation(s) in progress. When the  
Save-to-Disk function is activated your notebook  
saves the contents of the system memory to a file  
on the internal hard drive, and then automatical-  
ly shuts off power to your notebook. This is the  
same pseudo-off state as the Windows 95 power  
off. When you resume operation by pressing the  
Suspend/Resume button, you return to the point  
in the operation where you left off, before going  
into Save-to-Disk mode.  
Save-to-Disk Mode  
P O I N T  
The Save-to-Disk function saves the contents of  
your notebooks system memory to the hard  
drive whenever you:  
The main advantage of using the  
Save-to-Disk function is that power is  
not required to maintain your data. This  
is particularly important if you will be  
leaving your notebook in a suspended  
state for a prolonged period of time. The  
drawback of using Save-to-Disk mode  
is that it lengthens the power down and  
power up sequences and resets  
Press the Suspend/Resume button until  
acknowledged with Save-to-Disk mode  
enabled from the Power Savings menu of the  
BIOS setup utility.  
Select Suspend from the Windows 95 Start  
menu with Save-to-Disk mode enabled by  
the BIOS setup utility.  
P O I N T  
peripheral devices.  
If power is lost during Save-to-Disk mode  
the data will be retrieved automatically as  
soon as power is returned.  
Select Save-to-Disk activation from the  
PowerPanel toolbar or menu.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
pendent of the Suspend/Resume button. This  
parameter is enabled and disabled in the BIOS  
setup utility.  
Idle Mode  
P O I N T  
Idle mode is one of the power management  
parameters. When Idle mode is enabled the  
CPU is put into low-speed operation when  
there is no activity (keystroke, pointer action,  
sound generation, video display change,  
modem transmission or reception, etc.) on your  
notebook for 16 seconds. Any activity will cause  
the normal operation to restart automatically.  
This feature is independent of the Suspend/  
Resume button. This parameter is enabled  
and disabled in the BIOS setup utility.  
(See page 97.)  
Save-to-Disk mode requires allocating a  
significant amount of hard drive capacity  
for saving all system memory, which  
reduces your usable disk space. When  
you purchase your notebook it will have  
space allocated for the memory installed.  
If you upgrade the original system by  
adding a memory upgrade module  
without changing the size of your Save-  
to-Disk allocation you will get an error  
message when you try to activate Save-  
to-Disk mode and it will not work. Use  
the PHDISK Utility to increase the size  
of the Save-to-Disk file, SAVE2DSK.BIN.  
(Refer to Setting Up Your Save-to-Disk  
File Allocation on pages 113-114 for  
more information.) If you need help  
contact your support representative  
for recommendations.  
Video Timeout  
The Video Timeout is one of the power man-  
agement parameters which saves power by  
turning off the display if there is no keyboard  
or pointer activity for the user selected timeout  
period. Any keyboard or pointer activity will  
cause the display to restart automatically. This  
feature is independent of the Suspend/Resume  
button. This parameter is enabled and disabled  
in the BIOS setup utility. (See page 97.)  
Standby Mode  
Hard Disk Timeout  
Standby mode is one of the power management  
parameters. When Standby mode is activated,  
your notebook puts the CPU in low-speed  
operation,shuts off the display and turns off  
the hard drive when there is no activity (key-  
stroke, pointer action,sound generation, video  
display change,modem transmission or recep-  
tion, etc.) on your notebook for the user select-  
ed time-out period. (See page 98.) Any activity  
will cause your notebook to return to normal  
operation automatically. This feature is inde-  
The Hard Disk Timeout is one of the power  
management parameters which saves power  
by turning off the hard drive if there is no hard  
drive access for the timeout period which has  
been set in the BIOS setup utility. (See page 97.)  
Any attempt to access the hard drive will cause  
the hard drive to restart automatically. This  
feature is independent of the Suspend/  
Resume button. This parameter is enabled  
and disabled in the BIOS setup utility.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Windows 95 Control Panel  
INTERNAL MODEM  
C A U T I O N  
The Power icon in the Windows 95 Control  
Panel allows you to enable or disable all the  
power management settings which can be made  
from the desktop. Selecting Allow Windows to  
manage power use on this computer”allows the  
operating system to enable Phoenix Technologies  
PowerPanel and Windows 95 Control panel  
settings.When Windows 95 power management  
is disabled the BIOS setup utility settings will  
control your power saving parameters.  
(See pages 96-101 for the BIOS setup utility  
Power Savings menu.)  
Your internal modem is a fax/data/voice  
modem controlled by Windows 95,LapLink,  
MegaPhone and other software. The voice  
functions of the modem include speakerphone,  
and answering machine capabilities. The  
answering machine capabilities require the use  
of third party software not included with your  
notebook. The other features are accessible via  
Windows 95,LapLink or MegaPhone.  
The internal modem on all notebooks  
distributed by Fujitsu Pc Corporation  
are not intended for use with public  
telephone networks outside the United  
States and Canada.  
INFRARED PORT  
Infrared IrDA-compatible communication is a  
function that allows for wireless data transfer  
between your notebook and other IrDA-com-  
patible devices. Examples of IrDA-compatible  
devices are another computer or a printer. When  
carrying out this kind of communication, both  
devices must be set so their infrared ports are  
directly facing each other without obstruction.  
A distance of 6" to 36" between the device ports  
is ideal. Dirt or scratches on the lens of your  
notebook or the other device will degrade  
performance. This is especially true for Fast IrDA  
applications such as a transfer to an Ethernet.  
C A U T I O N  
Your internal modem is designed to allow  
faster downloads from K56flex compliant  
digital sources. Maximum achievable  
download transmission rates may not  
reach 56 Kbps and will vary with  
line conditions.  
The Windows 95 Control Panel Power  
Management dialog box lets you set different  
hard drive timeouts for battery and AC power  
operation and to set PC Card modem  
power parameters.  
P O I N T  
You must restart your notebook for  
Windows 95 Control Panel setting  
changes to take affect.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
LapLink software can be used for Infrared  
file transfers. See your online help for  
more information.  
When a television or radio remote control  
unit, or a wireless headphone is being  
used nearby.  
ESS AudioRack  
The control of the AudioRack player software  
(AudioRack32) resembles the front panels of a  
rack of stereo equipment and is operated in  
much the same way. There is also AudioRack  
recording software (AudioRecorder).Online  
help screens are accessible from the AudioDrive  
panel of AudioRack32; click on the Help button  
for more information. In the AudioRecorder  
dialog box, click on Help in the top taskbar.  
When a strong light such as direct sunlight,  
fluorescent light, or incandescent light shines  
on the port.  
C A U T I O N  
Do not move either device during  
communication as it may interrupt  
data transmission.  
PRE-INSTALLED SOFTWARE  
Your LifeBook 900 Series comes with pre-  
installed software for playing audio and video  
files of various formats. In addition there is file  
transfer software, telephony software and virus  
protection software. If you need assistance with  
an individual application use their online help.  
In AudioRack32 the AudioDrive panel lets you  
turn on and off the available functions. When  
you left-click on a button it will activate.  
When a function is active its button on the  
AudioDrive shows a green dot and its control  
panel is in the equipment rack. When it is off  
the dot on the button is black and the control  
panel is not in the rack. You activate a slider or  
knob on a control panel by dragging it. The  
functions available are DAT (Digital Audio Tape  
player),3D (3D-Stereo sound control),MIDI,  
Mixer and CD (Audio CD player).  
C A U T I O N  
Be careful not to scratch the infrared port  
lens. Scratches, dirt or other surface  
marks can effect operation.  
P O I N T  
The following conditions may interfere with  
infrared communications:  
You can access all pre-installed software  
from categorized menu folders in the  
Start menu; Communications software  
(LapLink & Megaphone), Multimedia  
Software (AudioRack & SoftPEG), Service  
and Support software (McAfee VirusScan  
& PC-Doctor), and System Management  
Software (Tioman & PowerPanel).  
When the infrared communication ports  
are not directly facing each other, or some  
obstacle is between them.  
When the infrared communication ports are  
too far apart.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
LapLink  
McAfee VirusScan  
P O I N T  
Traveling Softwares LapLink file transfer  
software provides direct file transfers to other  
computers.Data transfers can be via internal  
modem,PC Card modem,infrared ports,  
a serial cable, or a parallel cable (cables are  
not included). See the LapLink online help  
screens for operating instructions for the  
LapLink application.  
Running your McAfee VirusScan program after  
loading data or programs from a floppy disk,  
CD-ROM,modem data transfer, or infrared  
data transfer is a precaution that will protect  
the data on your hard drive from contamina-  
tion or destruction. See your VirusScan online  
help screens for information on how and when  
to run this program.  
For maximum frequency response and  
bandwidth, leave the graphic equalizer  
levels at the mid-point (zero level). To  
customize the frequency response to  
your personal taste, adjust accordingly.  
C A U T I O N  
MegaPhone  
PC Doctor  
The ESS AudioRack volume settings  
set the maximum volume level of the  
hardware volume control knob for  
that function.  
MegaPhone by AVEO, Inc. is telephony soft-  
ware which provides access to the voice and fax  
features of your notebooks internal modem.  
It features dialing, speakerphone,and fax  
functions. See your MegaPhone online help  
screens for guidance in operating the  
MegaPhone software.  
PC Doctor by Watergate Software is primarily  
for use by your support representative when  
helping you with trouble shooting. (See pages  
146–166 for more information.)  
AGATÉ TIOMAN PRO-SWAP  
Tioman allows you to warm-swap your  
LifeBook 900 Series peripheral devices in  
the Multi-function bays of your notebook.  
Tioman will put the system into suspend  
mode permitting the swapping of a device.  
After resuming the system,the new device  
is automatically detected.  
C A U T I O N  
If you use a speakerphone function, be  
sure that the microphone setting in the  
ESS AudioRack is disabled.  
P O I N T  
For optimum speakerphone performance:  
Speak clearly.  
Limit background noise.  
Speak facing the keyboard from about  
one (1) foot away.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
Tioman supports warm-swapping of the  
following devices:  
Device  
ToolTip balloon  
in the bay. Hover over the icon with the cursor  
and the ToolTip balloon will display the name  
of the inserted device.  
Second HDD  
Hard drive in bay  
(Multi-function Bay 2 only)  
Diskette drive in bay  
(Multi-function Bay 1 only)  
CD-ROM drive in bay  
(Multi-function Bay 2 only)  
No device in bay  
(Multi-function Bay 1 only)  
CD–ROM drive in bay  
(Multi-function Bay 2 only)  
Optional Second 3.0GB hard drive.  
FDD  
Right-clicking on the icon will display the  
Tioman menu which offers items for swapping  
devices, getting help, and providing informa-  
tion about the Tioman software.  
3.5" floppy disk drive.  
24-speed maximum CD-ROM drive.  
CD-ROM  
Battery  
Lithium ion Battery.  
DVD drive.  
Removing Devices  
To remove the current device from the bay:  
DVD–ROM  
Using Tioman  
1. Close any open files on the removable device  
that you plan to eject from the computer.  
Tioman allows you to exchange removable  
devices without restarting the system by  
putting the system in suspend mode before  
you swap the device. Press the resume button  
and the system will automatically detect the  
new device. The software will automatically  
create drive letter(s) and list the drive under  
My Computerand Windows Explorer. The  
taskbar icon and the ToolTip balloon will be  
updated to reflect the current device inserted  
in the bay.  
Tioman Taskbar Icon  
Once the Tioman software in installed on your  
system and Windows 95 is running, small icons  
are displayed in the lower right hand corner of  
the taskbar. The left icon corresponds to Multi-  
function Bay 1 and the right icon to Multi-  
function Bay 2. The taskbar icons are your  
gateway into the capabilities of Tioman.  
2. Right-click on the Tioman taskbar icon to  
display its menu.  
3. Select the ‘Swap Device’ menu item.  
4. The Agate Tioman ProSwap for Fujitsu’ win-  
dow will come up asking if you wish to sus-  
pend the machine in order to swap the  
device. Select ‘yes.  
The icons provide a visual cue for the current  
inserted device. You will immediately notice  
whether a Floppy Disk drive, Secondary Hard  
drive,CD-ROM drive or DVD drive is inserted  
5. You can now safely remove the device from  
your notebook without damage to the  
notebook or the device.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
6. References to the devices drive letter listed  
under My Computerand Windows  
Explorer’ will automatically be removed.  
5. Depending on the device, one or more drive  
letter(s) will automatically be created and listed  
under My Computerand Windows Explorer.  
5. The setup wizard will guide you through the  
rest of the uninstall process.  
6. Tioman software will be removed completely,  
the next time Windows 95 is started.  
7. The taskbar icon and its ToolTip balloon will  
be updated to reflect the new device inserted  
in the bay.  
6. The taskbar icon and its ToolTip balloon will  
be updated to reflect the new device inserted  
in the bay.  
Secondary Hard Drive Swap Limitations  
If you ever boot with the second HDD installed  
in Multi-function Bay 2 and try to swap it,an  
error message “Removing INT 13 Devices is not  
supported...appears. This error occurs because  
Windows configured the hard drive as an INT  
13 drive and remembers the setting in the  
Registry. The following steps are required to  
enable the Tioman Proswap software to swap  
out the second HDD.  
Inserting Devices  
To insert a device into the bay:  
Control Panel  
Tioman adds a Control Panel application called  
Device Bay’ to your system. You can use this to  
display information about the bay and the  
inserted devices. You may also insert and  
remove devices as described in the previous sec-  
tion, using the button within the Device  
Bay dialog.  
1. Your notebook should already be in suspend  
mode. If it is not, proceed to the Removing  
Devices’ section and follow the steps to  
suspend the computer. Failure to do so  
can cause damage to your computer or  
the device.  
When you see the swap failure message perform  
the following steps:  
Uninstalling Tioman  
1. Open the Control Panel folder located under  
My Computer.  
2. You can now safely insert the device into the  
bay of the notebook without any damage.  
• Boot system without the second HDD  
Swap in the second HDD  
3. Press the resume button which will reactivate  
the notebook from suspend mode.  
2. Open the Add/Remove Programs’ icon.  
3. Select the Agate Tioman entry from the list of  
currently installed programs.  
4. The software will automatically detect the  
new device and place it online.  
• Go into Control Panel/System/Device  
Manager  
4. Click on the Add/Remove button to launch  
the uninstall application.  
• Look under Disk Drives  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
Select the second HDD and open properties  
• Select the settings tab, in the options box  
• Uncheck the INT 13 box  
The ATI Video Player comes pre-installed on  
your notebook, but there is a second version  
of the ATI Player located on your Recovery  
CD that contains drivers which allow you to  
use Zoom Video cards. You should install  
this new version of ATI Player before doing  
anything else.  
P O I N T  
When the external Floppy Disk Drive is  
attached to the notebook, a battery is in  
Multi-function Bay 1 and any device is in  
Multi-function Bay 2, the taskbar icon for  
Multi-function Bay 1 will show ‘Diskette  
drive in bay’ and Multi-function Bay 2’s  
icon will show the correct device. If you  
remove the external Floppy Disk Drive  
and suspend/resume the system, the  
taskbar icons for Multi-function Bay 1  
and Multi-function Bay 2 will now show  
the correct devices.  
• Select OK, BUT DO NOT RESTART  
• Shutdown system and turn the power  
switch to off.  
To install the new ATI Video Player:  
1. Locate the Emergency Recovery CD for your  
990Tx2. (It should be included in your box.)  
• Without the second HDD in system, turn  
the power switch to on .  
You must perform these steps every time  
the INT 13 box becomes checked on  
boot detection.  
2. Boot the notebook into Windows 95.  
3. Insert the Recovery CD.  
4. Open the ATIPlyr directory on the Recovery  
CD and run the Setup.exe program.  
P O I N T  
ATI VIDEO PLAYER  
The ATI Video Player for Windows 95 lets  
you enjoy the following functions with  
5. Folllow the on-screen directions to  
complete setup.  
When a battery is in Multi-function Bay  
1 and a Floppy Disk Drive is in Multi-  
function Bay 2, the taskbar icon for  
Multi-function Bay 1 will show ‘Diskette  
drive in bay’ and the Multi-function Bay  
2 icon will show ‘No Device in bay’.  
your 990Tx  
2:  
6. When the system has rebooted back into  
Windows 95 you are ready to use the ATI  
Player software.  
1. You can display video on your LCD panel.  
2. You can create animated pictures and still  
captures from video recording.  
You can connect any video device that has  
A/V (audio/video via an A/V cable) output  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
or S-Video output capability to your 990Tx2  
via the Composite Video in jack or S-Video in  
Port of the notebook. (See Figure 2-15.)  
Examples of video devices that have this  
capability: VCRs,some TVs,video game  
consoles, and camcorders.  
C A U T I O N  
Failure to unplug the AC Adapter from  
the notebook and unplug the power  
cord of the video device from a wall  
outlet may result in electric shock  
during installation.  
S-Video In  
To connect a video device to the notebook:  
1. Turn off the notebook from the power switch.  
Video  
Output  
Device  
Composite  
Video In  
2. Disconnect the AC Adapter.  
P O I N T  
Figure 2-15 connecting a video device  
3. Open the Connector Cover on the rear panel  
of the notebook.  
Wide-screen TV programs can not be  
displayed on the LCD panel.  
To play back video with the ATI Player:  
1. Connect the video device to the notebook.  
(Follow steps 1-7 in the previous section.)  
4. Turn off the video device that you are con-  
necting and unplug its power cord.  
P O I N T  
2. Click the Start menu, select Programs, ATI  
Multimedia and ATI Player.  
5. Connect one end of the video cable or  
S-Video cable from the output connection  
of the video device to the Composite Video  
in jack or S-Video in port on the notebook.  
(See Figure 2-15.)  
Most video devices have an audio  
out connection as well as video. The  
990Tx2 does not have an audio input  
connection. To take full advantage of  
audio out capability, connect the audio  
out of your video device to a home  
stereo system or amplifier.  
3.A replication of a TV set will appear in the  
center of your screen. You should be in Tuner  
mode which allows you to view video and  
capture still images. Capture mode allows  
you to capture video and save it in .AVI  
format. Capture mode is explained in  
the next section.  
6. Connect the AC Adapter to the notebook and  
power the notebook on.  
7.Plug in the power cord for the video device  
and turn it on.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T w  
o
4. Turn the video device on.  
9. The Camera button between the Play full  
screen video button and the ATI Video Player  
Setup button allows you to capture a still  
image of the video input. To capture an  
image click the button while the video input  
is feeding and a window containing the still  
will pop up on the desktop. There are options  
to save the image,throw it away, print it,set  
the curent desktop background to the image,  
or exit the window.  
5. To stop the capturing, push any button.  
The video capture will be saved in  
.AVI format.  
5. You should see the video from the video  
device playing in the ATI Player window.  
6. You can also capture single frames in .AVI  
format using the Capture frames button to  
the right of the Capture video button, you  
can capture a still image,(see step 9 in the  
previous section), you can playback the .AVI  
file you just captured using the Play/stop  
playback button, and you can edit the .AVI  
file (control where in the path the file begins  
and ends) using the Edit Mode on/off  
6. To switch to playback for an S-Video device,  
click the SVHS connector button on the bot-  
tom left-hand corner of the panel below the  
ATI Player window. To switch back to an A/V  
device, click the VHS Connector button. (The  
default setting is VHS Connector.)  
7. There are buttons on the bottom panel of the  
player which set the zoom ratio 1 to 1 and  
increase and decrease the window playback  
screen to play video full screen.Play with  
these buttons to find a comfortable  
viewing configuration.  
To record video playback with  
the ATI Player:  
button which looks like a pair of scissors.  
1. Follow steps 1-3 in the previous section.  
7. There is an ATI Video Player Setup button  
in Capture mode which has an extra panel,  
VCR, which has settings for recording video.  
Moving the cursor across any setting displays  
a text message at the bott om of the window  
which explains what this setting does.  
2. Click the Capture mode button on  
the top panel of the ATI Player  
(above the player window).  
8. The button on the far right-hand side of the  
bottom panel of the player opens the ATI  
Video Player Setup where you can configure  
several options for the player. Moving the  
cursor across any setting displays a text mes-  
sage at the bottom of the window which  
explains what this setting does.  
3. Follow steps 4-6 in the previous section.  
4. Click the Capture video button (the  
button with the camcorder and big red  
dot for record) to capture. Follow  
the on-screen directions.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S e c t i o n  
T h r e e  
Configuring Your LifeBook 900 Series  
Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Identifying the Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
BIOS Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Navigating Through the Setup Utility . . . . . 59  
Main Menu – Setting Standard  
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Advanced Menu – Setting Device  
Feature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Security Menu – Setting the  
Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Power Menu – Setting Power  
Management Feature Controls . . . . . . 96  
Boot Menu – Selecting the  
Operating System Source . . . . . . . . . 104  
Info Menu – Displaying Basic  
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Exit Menu – Leaving the Setup Utility. . . . 110  
Setting Up Your Save-To-Disk  
File Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
system displays the Windows 95 opening  
screen. The boot sequence is executed when:  
SECTION THREE  
CONFIGURING YOUR LIFEBOOK  
900 SERIES FROM FUJITSU  
This section explains the BIOS setup utility.  
The BIOS setup utility is required to set the  
date, time, power mangement modes,data  
security passwords and other operating  
parameters of your notebook.  
P O I N T  
When error messages occur see  
Section Five, pages 166-168, for help  
in understanding the meaning and  
required actions to be taken.  
You turn on power to the system using the  
power switch on the right side panel of your  
notebook. (Figure 2-5 on page 23.)  
You restart your computer from the  
Windows 95 Shutdown dialog box of the  
Start Menu.  
IDENTIFYING THE DRIVES  
Your notebook uses drive letters (Example A:,  
B:,C:,D:, E:) to identify internal and external  
devices such as hard drives, floppy disk drives,  
CD-ROM drives and PC Cards. The most com-  
monly assigned drive designators are listed  
below. If you add other devices,the drive desig-  
nators may be different. See your operating  
system manual for setting drive designations.  
BOOT SEQUENCE  
The software initiates a system restart.  
Example: When you install a new  
application.  
Each time you power up or restart your  
LifeBook 900 Series,it goes through a quiet  
boot sequence that displays a Fujitsu logo until  
your operating system is loaded. During quiet  
boot, your notebook is performing a standard  
boot sequence including a Power On Self Test  
(POST). To access the ability to change the  
drive that will be used for finding the operating  
system, press the Esc key anytime while the  
Fujitsu logo is displayed. To enter the BIOS  
setup utility press the F2 key anytime while  
the Fujitsu logo is displayed. When the boot  
sequence is completed without a failure and  
without a request for the setup utility, the  
You reset the system by pressing the three  
keys Ctrl+Alt+Del at the same time and then  
restart your computer from the Windows 95  
Shutdown dialog box.  
Drive Designators  
A:Floppy disk drive.  
P O I N T  
Installable in either of the multi-function  
bays of your notebook, or use the external  
floppy disk drive.  
The BIOS setup utility is entered by  
pressing the F2 key during the boot  
process while the Fujitsu logo is on  
the screen.  
B: Not used with your notebook.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
C: Hard drive.  
The setup utility configures:  
Change an audio parameter setting.  
Installed inside your notebook.  
Change the selection of whether to use the  
built-in display, an external monitor or both.  
(For a more convenient process, see the Fn key  
on page 33.)  
Standard system parameters, such as date  
D:CD-ROM drive, DVD drive, or optional  
second hard drive. Installable in Multi-  
function Bay 2 of your notebook.  
and time.  
Device control feature parameters, such as  
I/O addresses and boot devices.  
Change the system data security settings.  
Power Management parameters that help to  
C A U T I O N  
Routinely Entering the Setup Utility  
You can enter the setup utility whenever you  
turn on or reset the system. To do this:  
conserve your notebooks batteries.  
A bootable CD-ROM may have either a  
floppy disk format or a hard drive format.  
When using a bootable CD-ROM, drive  
designations will automatically change  
according to which format is used.  
System Data Security feature parameters,  
such as passwords.  
1. Allow the system to start booting.  
You will only have to change the utility settings  
if you want to:  
2. As soon as the Fujitsu logo appears on the  
(See page 106 for more information.)  
screen, press the F2 key.  
Change the date or time. (You can also  
3. The Main menu of the setup utility then  
appears with the cur rent settings of the  
parameters displayed.  
do this without entering the setup utility,  
through your operating system. See your  
operating system manual.)  
BIOS SETUP UTILITY  
The BIOS setup utility is a program that sets  
the operating environment for your notebook.  
It is referred to in this publication as the setup  
utility. There is no need to set or change the  
environment to operate as it is set at the factory  
for normal operating conditions.  
4. If you wish to go to one of the other setup  
menus, press the Ó or the È key to find the  
menu you require.  
Change the primary boot device.  
Change the power mangement parameter  
settings. (For a more convenient process, see  
the PowerPanel on pages 41-43.)  
Change a port address or other parameter.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
1. When you turn on or restart the computer  
there is a beep and/or the following message  
appears on the screen:  
P O I N T  
P O I N T  
If your data security settings require it,  
you may be asked for a password before  
the Main menu will appear.  
If your data security settings require it,  
you may be asked for a password before  
the operating system will be opened.  
Error message - please run  
SETUP program  
Press <F1> key to continue, <F2>  
to run SETUP  
3. If an error message is displayed on the  
screen, and you want to enter the setup  
utility, press the F2 key.  
Entering the Setup Utility After a  
Configuration Change or System Failure  
If there has been a change in the system config-  
uration that does not agree with the parameter  
settings stored in your BIOS memory, or there  
is a failure in the system,the system beeps  
and/or displays an error message after the  
Power On Self Test (POST). If the failure is  
not too severe,it will give you the opportunity  
to modify the settings of the setup utility, as  
described in the following steps:  
2. If an error message is displayed on the  
screen,and you want to continue with the  
boot process and start the operating system  
anyway, press the F1 key.  
4. When the setup utility starts with a fault pre-  
sent,the system displays the following message:  
Warning!  
C A U T I O N  
Error message  
[Continue]  
If your notebook beeps a series of  
beeps that sounds like a code and the  
display is blank, please refer to the  
Troubleshooting Section. (See page 146.)  
The Troubleshooting Section includes  
a list of error messages and their  
meanings. (See pages 166-168.)  
5. Press any key to enter the setup utility. The  
system will then display the Main Menu with  
current parameters values.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
5. To return to a menu from a submenu, press  
the Esc key.  
7.Pressing the F9 key resets all items in the  
current menu to the default values.  
NAVIGATINGTHROUGH  
THE SETUP UTILITY  
The BIOS setup utility consists of six menus;  
MAIN,ADVANCED, SECURITY, POWER  
BOOT and EXIT. The remainder of Section  
Three explains each menu in turn including  
all submenus and setup items.  
6. To go to the Exit menu from any other  
menu, press the Esc key.  
8. Pressing the F10 key saves the current  
configuration and exits the BIOS Setup  
Utility. You will be asked to verify this  
selection before it is executed.  
P O I N T  
9. Pressing the F1 key gives you a general  
help screen.  
Selecting a field causes a help message  
about that field to be displayed on the  
right-hand side of the screen  
The following procedures allow you to navigate  
the setup utility menus:  
P O I N T  
1. To select a menu, use the cursor keys: Ó , È.  
The BIOS setup screens in this manual  
are only representations of the actual  
BIOS setup screens. Your BIOS setup  
screens may vary.  
2. To select a field within a menu or a sub-  
P O I N T  
menu,use the cursor keys: Õ, Ô.  
Pressing the Enter key with the highlight  
on a selection that is not a submenu or  
auto selection will cause a list of all  
options for that item to be displayed.  
Pressing the Enter key or Esc key will  
select the highlighted choice and  
remove the list.  
3. To select the different values for each field,  
press the Spacebar or + to change to the next  
higher selection and F5 or - to go to the next  
lower selection.  
4. To activate a submenu press the Enter key.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
MAIN MENU – SETTING  
STANDARD SYSTEM PARAMETERS  
The Main Menu allows you to set or view the  
current system parameters. Follow the instruc-  
tions for Navigating Through The Setup Utility  
to make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-1 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Main menu,all of the options for each  
field,the default settings and a description of  
the fields function and any special information  
needed to help understand the fields use.  
P O I N T  
System Time and System Date can  
also be set from your operating system  
without using the setup utility. Use the  
calendar and time icon on your Control  
panel for Windows 95 or type time or  
date from the MS-DOS prompt.  
Figure 3-1 Main Menu  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-1 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Main Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
System Time:  
Sets and displays the current time. Time is in a 24 hour format  
of hours:minutes:seconds with 2 digits for each.(HH:MM:SS).  
Example: 16:45:57. You may change each segment of the time  
separately. Move between the segments with the Tab key and/or  
Shift + Tab keys.  
System Date:  
Sets and displays the current date. Date is in a month/day/year  
numeric format with 2 digits each for month and day and 4 digits  
for year. (MM/DD/YYYY) for example: 03/20/1996. You may  
change each segment of the date separately. Move between the  
segments with the Tab key and/or Shift + Tab keys.  
Legacy Diskette A:  
Primary Master:  
1.44/1.25MB 3 1/2"; Disabled. [1.44/1.25MB 3 1/2"] Sets the format for floppy disk drive A if it is installed.  
Selects Primary  
[IBM-DPLA-25120]  
Displays the type of device on this ATA/ATAPI interface,if there is  
one. Pressing the Enter key selects the Primary Master submenu  
allowing additional device configuration options for this interface.  
Master submenu.  
Secondary Master:  
Selects Secondary  
Master submenu.  
[TOSHIBA CD-ROM Displays the type of device on this ATA/ATAPI interface, if there is  
XM-1702B]  
one. Pressing the Enter key selects the Secondary Master submenu  
allowing additional device configuration options for this interface.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-1 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Main Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Secondary Slave:  
Selects Secondary  
Slave submenu.  
[None]  
Displays the type of device on this ATA/ATAPI interface,if there is  
one. Pressing the Enter key selects the Secondary Slave submenu  
allowing additional device configuration options for this interface.  
System Memory:  
Extended Memory:  
Memory Cache:  
Language:  
640 KB  
31 MB  
Displays the size of system memory, which is detected  
automatically and cannot be changed by the setup utility.  
Displays the size of extended memory which is detected  
automatically and cannot be changed by the setup utility.  
Selects the memory  
cache submenu.  
Allows you to set your system to use external memory cache.  
English (US); Japanese (JP).  
[English (US)]  
The default setting differs between the US/European  
and the Japanese model. Selects the display language for the BIOS.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Primary Master – Submenu  
The Primary Master, Secondary Master/Slave  
submenus are identical for hard drives. They  
have the capacity displayed at the top of the  
screen as well as on Main menu. Follow the  
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup  
Utility to make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-2 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Primary Master submenu,all of the  
options for each field, the default settings and  
a description of the fields function and any  
special information needed to help understand  
the fields use.  
P O I N T  
The BIOS setup screens in this manual  
are only representations of the actual  
BIOS setup screens. Your BIOS setup  
screens may vary.  
Figure 3-2 Primary Master, Secondary Master/Slave Submenus  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-2 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Primary Master, Secondary Master/Slave Submenus  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Type:  
Auto; None;CD-ROM;  
ATAPI Removable; User.  
[Auto]  
Selects the ATA/ATAPI device type. Select Auto to have the type  
automatically identified by the BIOSat POST. If None is selected,  
all of the following Set-up items do not appear. Select CD-ROM  
if a CD-ROM drive is installed at this connection. If User is  
selected, you must specify the number of Cylinders, Heads,  
and Sectors for the drive. Select ATAPI Removable if a removable  
disk drive is installed at this connection.  
Cylinders:  
Heads:  
A number between 0  
and 65,535.  
This item appears only when Auto is selected and the type is  
identified as hard disk, or User is selected. When User is selected,  
you can change the value. This field is changed by incrementing  
(pressing the Spacebar) or by typing in the number.  
A number between 1 and 16.  
A number between 0 and 63.  
This item appears only when Auto is selected and the type is  
identified as hard disk, or User is selected. When User is selected,  
you can change the value. This field is changed by incrementing  
(pressing the Spacebar) or by typing in the number.  
Sectors:  
This item appears only when Auto is selected and the type is  
identified as hard disk, or User is selected. When User is selected,  
you can change the value. This field is changed by incrementing  
(pressing the Spacebar) or by typing in the number.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-2 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Primary Master, Secondary Master/Slave Submenus  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Maximum Capacity:  
Display only.  
Displays the maximum capacity of the drive calculated from the  
parameters of the hard disk when Auto is selected and the type  
is identified as hard disk, or User is selected.  
Multi-Sector Transfers:  
LBA Mode Control:  
Transfer Mode:  
Disabled; 2; 4; 8;16.  
MAX 32;MAX 64;MAX 128.  
This option cannot be changed when Auto is selected.Specify the  
number of sectors per block for multiple sector transfer. MAX  
refers to the size the disk returns when required.  
Enabled; Disabled.  
Enables or disables logical Block Addressing in place of Cylinder,  
Head, Sector addressing. This option cannot be changed when  
Auto is selected.  
Standard, Fast PIO 1; Fast PIO 2  
Fast PIO 3; Fast PIO 4;  
Fast PIO 3 / DMA;  
Selects the method for moving data to/from the drive. Autotype  
the drive to select the optimum transfer mode. This option  
cannot be changed when Auto is selected. Multi-word DMA  
is automatically set to mode 1 for Fast PIO 1, Fast PIO 2,  
Fast PIO 3,and set to mode 2 for Fast PIO 4 / DMA.  
Fast PIO 4 / DMA.  
Ultra DMA Mode:  
Disabled; Mode 0;  
Mode 1; Mode 2.  
Selects the method for moving data to/from the drive. Autotype  
the drive to select the optimum transfer mode. This option  
cannot be changed when Auto is selected.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Memory Cache – Submenu  
The Memory Cache submenu provides the  
ability to enable or disable external cache  
memory for your processor. Follow the instruc-  
tions for Navigating Through the Setup Utility  
to make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-3 shows the names of the menu fields for  
the Memory Cache submenu,all the options for  
each field,the default settings and a description  
of the fields function and any special informa-  
tion needed to help understand the fields use.  
Figure 3-3 Memory Cache Submenu of the Main Menu  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-3 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Memory Cache Submenu  
Menu Field  
External Cache:  
Options  
Enabled; Disabled.  
Default  
[Enabled]  
Description  
Turns external memory cache on and off.  
Exiting from the Main Menu  
When you have finished setting the parameters  
on this menu, you can either exit from the  
setup utility, or move to another menu. If you  
wish to exit from the setup utility, press the  
Esc key or use the cursor keys to go to the  
Exit menu. If you wish to move to another  
menu,use the cursor keys. (See Navigating  
Through the Setup Utility on page 59 for  
more information.)  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
ADVANCED MENU – SETTING  
DEVICE FEATURE CONTROLS  
The Advanced Menu allows you to:  
Enable or disable support for Plug & Play  
operating systems.  
Enable or disable BIOS support for ACPI.  
Set the I/O addresses for the serial and  
parallel ports.  
Set the communication mode for the  
parallel port.  
Select between the display panel and an  
external CRT display.  
Enable or disable compensation for  
your display.  
Configure PCI devices in your system.  
Figure 3-4 Advanced Menu  
Follow the instructions for Navigating  
Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.  
(See page 59.)  
Table 3-4 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Advanced Menu,all of the options for  
each field, the default settings and a description  
of the fields function and any special informa-  
tion needed to help understand the fields use.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-4 Field Names, Options and Defaults for the Advanced Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Plug & Play O/S:  
Yes; No.  
[Yes]  
Select Yes if you are using a Plug & Play capable operating system.  
Select No if you need the BIOS to configure non-boot devices.  
Secure Setup  
Yes; No.  
[No]  
Yes prevents a Plug & Play operating system from changing  
Configuration:  
system settings.  
I/O Device  
Configuration:  
When selected, opens the I/O Device Configuration submenu  
which allows the user to modify settings for parallel and serial  
ports,the floppy disk controller, and the local bus IDE adapter.  
Keyboard/Mouse Features:  
Video Features:  
When selected, opens the Keyboard/Mouse Features submenu,  
which allows setting external and internal keyboard and  
mouse parameters.  
When selected, opens the Video Features submenu, which allow  
setting of the display parameters, including routing of video  
signals to different displays.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-4 Field Names, Options and Defaults for the Advanced Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
PCI Configuration:  
When selected, opens additional menus to configure PCI devices.  
DMI Event Logging:  
ACPI Features:  
When selected, opens the DMI event logging configuration menu.  
When selected, opens the ACPI features menu, which allows  
enabling and disabling ACPI BIOS.  
Chipset Configuration:  
When selected, opens the Chipset Configuration menu.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
C A U T I O N  
I/O addresses, DMA channels and  
Interrupt levels can be entered in various  
ways, including via the BIOS setup utility,  
the control software for the I/O device, or  
the hardware. If any two ports or devices,  
serial or parallel, have the same I/O  
address assigned your notebook will not  
function normally. Please keep a record of  
original settings before making any  
changes in the event that a restoration is  
required. See your hardware and software  
documentation as well as the setup utility  
to determine settings, limitations, etc.  
I/O Device Configuration Submenu  
of the Advanced Menu  
The I/O Device Configuration submenu provides  
the ability to set the I/O addresses and interrupt  
levels for the parallel and serial ports, and disk  
drive controllers of your notebook. Follow the  
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup  
Utility to make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Figure 3-5 I/O Device Configuration Submenu  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-5 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the I/O Device Configuration submenu,all  
of the options for each field,the default settings  
and a description of the fields function and any  
special information needed to help understand  
the fields use.  
P O I N T  
P O I N T  
To prevent IRQ and address conflicts,  
avoid changing the default settings.  
If you must change the settings, you  
can call 1-800-8FUJITSU for  
All I/O addresses in Table 3-5 are in  
hexadecimal.  
technical assistance.  
C A U T I O N  
The BIOS will warn you of a resource  
conflict by placing a yellow asterisk next  
to each device that is in conflict.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-5 Fields, Options and Defaults for the I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Serial Port A:  
Disabled;Enabled; Auto.  
[Enabled]  
Configures the serial port A using either no configuration  
(Disabled),a user defined configuration (Enabled), or by  
allowing the BIOS or OS to choose the configuration (Auto).  
Base I/O address:  
Interrupt:  
3F8; 2F8; 3E8; 2E8.  
[3F8]  
Allows user to set the serial port base I/O address when port  
A is Enabled.  
IRQ 3; IRQ 4;  
IRQ 10; IRQ 11.  
[IRQ 4]  
[Enabled]  
Allows user to set the serial port interrupt when port A  
is Enabled.  
Serial Port B:  
Disabled;Enabled; Auto.  
Configures the serial port A using either no configuration  
(Disabled),a user defined configuration (Enabled), or by  
allowing the BIOS or OS to choose the configuration (Auto).  
Mode:  
IrDA; FIR.  
[FIR]  
[2E8]  
Allows user to set the serial port mode when port B is Enabled.  
Base I/O address:  
3F8; 2F8; 3E8;2E8.  
Allows user to set the serial port base I/O address when port B  
is Enabled.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-5 Fields, Options and Defaults for the I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Interrupt:  
IRQ 3; IRQ 4;  
IRQ 10; IRQ 11.  
[IRQ 3]  
Allows user to set the serial port interrupt when port B  
is Enabled.  
Base I/O address:  
DMA channel:  
Parallel port:  
Mode:  
100;108; 110;118.  
[118]  
When the mode for serial port B is set to FIR,this option is  
available allowing the user to set the base I/O address for the  
FIR of serial port B.  
DMA 1; DMA 3.  
[DMA 3]  
When the mode for serial port B is set to FIR,this option is  
available allowing the user to set the DMA channel for the  
FIR of serial port B.  
Disabled; Enabled; Auto.  
[Enabled]  
[Bi-directiona1]  
Configures the parallel port using either no configuration  
(Disabled),a user defined configuration (Enabled), or by  
allowing the BIOS or OS to choose the configuration (Auto).  
Output Only;  
Bi-directional; ECP.  
When the parallel port is enabled this option is available allowing  
the user to set the mode for the parallel port. Bi-directional allows  
two-way transfer of information between your notebook and a  
connected parallel device.Output Only (Half Duplex) allows  
information to be transferred in only one direction,from your  
notebook to the printer or similar device.ECP Mode allows  
communication with the ECP class of parallel I/O devices.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-5 Fields, Options and Defaults for the I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Base I/O address:  
378; 278; 3BC.  
[378]  
Allows user to set the parallel port base I/O address when the  
parallel port is Enabled.  
Interrupt:  
IRQ 5;IRQ 7.  
[IRQ 7]  
Allows user to set the parallel port interrupt when the parallel  
port is Enabled.  
Floppy disk controller:  
Disabled; Enabled; Auto.  
[Enabled]  
Enables and disables the floppy disk drive controller for both  
multi-function bays and the external floppy disk drive port.  
When Auto is selected,allows the BIOS to choose the  
configuration for the controller.  
Local Bus  
Both; Disabled;  
[Both]  
Enables and disables the integrated local bus IDE adapter.  
IDE adapter:  
Primary; Secondary.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Keyboard/Mouse Features Submenu  
The Keyboard/Mouse Features submenu is for  
setting the parameters of the integrated and  
external mouse and keyboard. Follow the  
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup  
Utility to make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-6 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Keyboard/Mouse submenu,all of the  
options for each field,the default settings and  
a description of the fields function and any  
special information needed to help understand  
the fields use.  
Figure 3-6 Keyboard/Mouse Features Submenu  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-6 Fields, Options and Defaults of the Keyboard/Mouse Submenu of the Advanced Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Numlock:  
Auto; Off;On.  
[Auto]  
Sets the NumLock function state when the computer  
completes booting.  
Hot Plug:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
[Enabled]  
Enables and disables the ability to plug a mouse or keyboard into  
the PS/2 port and have it immediately recognized and active.  
Internal Pointing Device:  
Auto Disabled;  
Always Enabled.  
[Auto Disabled]  
Sets the device controlling the mouse cursor on the screen. Always  
Enabled makes the ErgoTrac pointing device always enabled  
whether there is an external mouse or not. Auto Disabled makes  
the ErgoTrac pointing device turn off when an external pointing  
device is connected to the PS/2 port.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Video Features Submenu  
The Video Features Submenu is for setting the  
display and video output parameters. Follow  
the instructions for Navigating Through the  
Setup Utility to make any changes.  
(See page 59.)  
Table 3-8 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Video Features submenu,all of the  
options for each field,the default settings and  
a description of the fields function and any  
special information needed to help understand  
the fields use.  
Figure 3-8 Video Features Submenu  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-8 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Video Features Submenu of the Advanced Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Display:  
Flat-Panel;CRT;  
Simultaneous.  
[Flat-Panel]  
Selects where the video signal will be routed.  
Compensation:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
[Disabled]  
Enables or disables compensation which controls spacing on the  
display. When Enabled displays with less than 800 x 600 pixel  
resolution will still cover the entire screen.  
TV Output:  
Enabled; Disabled  
NTSC; PAL  
[Disabled]  
[NTSC]  
Enables or disables the composite video output jack.  
TV Standard:  
Selects TV standard to be used by the composite video jack.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
PCI Configuration Submenu  
The PCI Configuration submenu allows the  
user to reserve specific interrupts (IRQs) for  
legacy ISA devices,and to enable or disable  
built in PCI device modules. Follow the  
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup  
Utility to make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-9 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the PCI Configuration submenu,all of the  
options for each field,the default settings and  
a description of the fields function and any  
special information needed to help understand  
the fields use.  
Figure 3-9 PCIConfiguration Submenu  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-9 Fields, Options and Defaults for the PCI Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
IRQ Resource Exclusion:  
Accesses a submenu allowing the user to reserve specific IRQs for  
use by legacy ISA devices.  
Internal Modem:  
Disabled; Enabled.  
[Enabled]  
Allows the internal modem module to be enabled or disabled.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
IRQ Reservation Submenu  
of the PCI Configuration Submenu  
The IRQ Reservation submenu of the PCI  
Configuration submenu allows the user to mark  
various IRQs as reserved for use by legacy ISA  
devices. When an IRQ is reserved,the BIOS  
does not use it for embedded PCI or ISA  
devices. Follow the instructions for Navigating  
Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.  
(See page 59.)  
Table 3-10 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the IRQ Reservation submenu of the PCI  
Configuration submenu,all of the options for  
each field,the default settings and a description  
of the fields function and any special informa-  
tion needed to help understand the fields use.  
Figure 3-10 IRQ Reservation Submenu  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-10 Fields, Options and Defaults for the IRQ Reservation Submenu of the of the PCI Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
IRQ 3:  
Available; Reserved.  
[Available]  
Reserves IRQ 3. If Reserved is selected,the BIOS reserves IRQ 3  
for use by legacy ISA devices and does not use it for embedded  
PCI or ISA devices. IRQ 3 is removed from the IRQ bitmap in  
the PCI IRQ routing table.  
IRQ 4:  
IRQ 5:  
IRQ 7:  
IRQ 9:  
IRQ 10:  
IRQ 11:  
Available; Reserved.  
Available; Reserved.  
Available; Reserved.  
Available; Reserved.  
Available; Reserved.  
Available; Reserved.  
[Available]  
[Available]  
[Available]  
[Available]  
[Available]  
[Available]  
Reserves IRQ 4.  
Reserves IRQ 5.  
Reserves IRQ 7.  
Reserves IRQ 9.  
Reserves IRQ 10.  
Reserves IRQ 11.  
C A U T I O N  
Only IRQ's 5, 9, 10, & 11 can be  
reserved without conflict.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
DMI Event Logging Submenu  
of the Advanced Menu  
The DMI Event Logging Submenu is for setting  
up the logs DMI event logging. Follow the  
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup  
Utility to make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-11 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the DMI Event Logging submenu, all the  
options for each field,the default settings and  
a description of the fields function and any  
special information needed to help understand  
the fields use.  
Figure 3-11 DMI Event Logging Submenu  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-11 Fields, options and Defaults for the DMI Event Logging Submenu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Event log capacity:  
Display only.  
[Space Available]  
Event log validity:  
Display only.  
Yes; No.  
[Valid]  
[No]  
Clear all DMI event logs:  
A Yes selection causes the event logs to clear at the next boot.  
Once the logs are cleared this automatically sets to No until reset  
to yes by selecting yes here.  
Event Logging:  
System Boot Event:  
ECC Event:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
Enabled; Disabled.  
Enabled; Disabled.  
[Enabled]  
[Disabled]  
[Enabled]  
Turns event logging on and off for all DMI events.  
Turns event logging on and off for DMI system boot events.  
Turns event logging on and off for ECC memory events.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
ACPI Features Submenu  
of the Advanced Menu  
The ACPI Features Submenu is for setting up  
the Windows 98 Advanced Configuration and  
Power Interface parameters. Follow the instruc-  
tions for Navigating Through the Setup Utility  
to make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-12 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the ACPI Features submenu,all the options  
for each field,the default settings and a descrip-  
tion of the fields function and any special  
information needed to help understand the  
field’s use.  
Figure 3-12 ACPI Features Submenu  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-12 Fields, options and Defaults for the ACPI Features Submenu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Enable ACPI:  
Yes; No.  
[Yes]  
Turns on and off the Advanced Configuration and  
Power Interface.  
C A U T I O N  
This feature is only supported in  
Windows 98. It is not advisable that you  
turn this setting on/off! Always leave the  
default setting for Enable ACPI [Yes].  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Chipset Configuration  
Submenu of the Advanced Menu  
The Chipset Configuration Submenu is for  
configuring the features of the AGP video  
device. Follow the instructions for navigating  
through the Setup Utility to make any changes.  
(See page 59.)  
Table 3-13 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Chipset Configuration submenu,all the  
options for each field,the default settings and  
a description of the fields function and any  
special information needed to help understand  
the fields use.  
Figure 3-13 Chipset Configuration Submenu  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-13 Chipset Configuration Submenu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
AGP Data Tranfer Type:  
Standard (lx); High Speed (2x) [Standard (lx)]  
Sets the Data Transfer type for the AGP video device.  
AGP Aperture Size:  
64MB; 128MB; 256Mb; 4MB; [64MB]  
4–256 MB  
Sets the maximum size of the Graphics Aperture for the  
AGP video device.  
Exiting from the Advanced Menu  
When you have finished setting the parameters  
on the Advanced Menu, you can either exit  
from setup utility or move to another menu.  
If you wish to exit from setup utility, press the  
Esc key to go to the Exit menu. If you wish to  
move to another menu,use the cursor keys.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
SECURITY MENU – SETTING  
THE SECURITY FEATURES  
The Security menu allows you to set up the data  
security features of your notebook to fit your  
operating needs and to view the current data  
security configuration. Follow the instructions  
for Navigating Through the Setup Utility to  
make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-14 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Security menu,all of the options for  
each field, the default settings and a description  
of the field's function and any special informa-  
tion needed to help understand the field's use.  
The default condition is no passwords required  
and no write protection.  
Figure 3-14 Security Menu  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
P O I N T  
P O I N T  
If you set a password, write it down and  
keep it in a safe place. If you forget the  
password you will have to contact your  
support representative to regain access  
to your secured functions and data.  
If you make an error when re-entering  
the password a [Warning]will be  
displayed on the screen. To try again  
press the Enter key and then retype the  
password. Press the Esc key to abort  
the password setting process.  
C A U T I O N  
C A U T I O N  
Entering a password incorrectly 3 times  
in a row will cause the keyboard and  
mouse to be locked out and the warning  
[System Disabled]to be displayed.  
If this happens restart the computer by  
turning off and on the power with the  
power switch and use the correct  
password on reboot.  
If the Power Management Security is  
Enabled and the Password on Boot is  
Disabled you will not be able to resume  
operation from the Suspend or Save-to-  
Disk modes.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-14 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Security Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Supervisor Password is:  
Clear  
A display-only field. Set is displayed when the system  
supervisor password is set and Clear when it is not.  
User Password is:  
Clear  
A display-only field. Set is displayed when the general user  
password is set, and Clear when it is not.  
Set Supervisor Password:  
[Enter]  
Sets, changes or cancels the Supervisor Password. The Supervisor  
Password may be up to seven characters long and must include  
only lower-case letters or numbers. To cancel a password press  
the Enter key instead of entering characters in the Enter New  
Password field and in the Re-enter New Password field. When  
a Supervisor Password is set it must be used to access the BIOS  
setup utility.  
Set User Password:  
[Enter]  
(This field can only be accessed if the Supervisor Password is set.)  
Sets, changes or cancels the User Password. The User Password  
may be up to seven characters long and must include only lower  
case letters or numbers. To cancel a password press the Enter key  
instead of entering characters in the Enter New Password field and  
in the Re-enter New Password field. When a User Password is set  
it must be used to access the BIOS setup utility.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-14 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Security Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Diskette access:  
All; Supervisor Only.  
[All]  
Sets the floppy disk access to be secured for access only with  
Supervisor's password or by all users with a password. The default  
is all users with a password.  
Password on boot:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
[Disabled]  
When set to Enabled,a password (User or Supervisor) is required  
after the Power On Self Test (POST) before the operating system  
will be read from a disk. When set to Disabled no password is  
required. If no Supervisor Password is set this feature is not  
available and no password is required.  
Power Management  
Security:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
[Disabled]  
[Normal]  
When set to Enabled, a password (User or Supervisor) is required  
to resume from Suspend or Save-to-Disk mode. The password  
required is the same one required by the Password on Boot function.  
Fixed disk boot sector:  
Normal; Write Protect.  
Sets write protection for the sector of the boot disk which contains  
the operating system. When set to Write Protect,the BIOS will  
prevent any application from writing into the sector of the internal  
hard drive containing the operating system. When set to Normal  
there is no BIOS protection of the operating system.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-14 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Security Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Fixed disk security:  
Primary Master:  
Secondary Master:  
Secondary Slave:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
Enabled; Disabled.  
Enabled; Disabled.  
[Disabled]  
[Disabled]  
[Disabled]  
When set to Enabled ,a password (User or Supervisor) is required  
to access data on the disk drive on the Primary Master interface.  
When set to Enabled , a password (User or Supervisor) is required  
to access data on the disk drive on the Secondary Master interface.  
When set to Enabled , a password (User or Supervisor) is required  
to access data on the disk dr ive on the Secondary Master interface.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
P O I N T  
Boot sector protection must be set  
to [Normal]to install or upgrade an  
operating system.  
Exiting from the Security Menu  
When you have finished setting the parameters  
on the Security Menu, you can either exit from  
setup utility or move to another menu. If you  
wish to exit from setup utility, press the Esc key  
to go to the Exit Menu. If you wish to move to  
another menu,use the cursor keys.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
POWER MENU –  
SETTING POWER MANAGEMENT  
FEATURE CONTROLS  
The Power menu allows you to set and change  
the power management parameters. Follow the  
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup  
Utility to make any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-15 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Power menu,all of the options for each  
field,the default settings and a description of  
the field's function and any special information  
needed to help understand the field's use.  
P O I N T  
Most power management parameters can  
also be set from the Windows 95 desktop  
without entering the setup utility, using  
PowerPanel by Phoenix Technologies.  
Changing the settings with PowerPanel  
does not change what is stored in the  
CMOS memory. (See pages 41-44.)  
Figure 3-15 Power Menu  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-15 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Power Savings:  
Customized; Maximum  
Performance; Maximum  
Power Savings, Disabled.  
[Customized]  
Sets the power savings parameters to a factory installed  
combination of parameters,a custom set of parameters set by you  
or no power saving features.  
Hard Disk Timeout:  
30 seconds to  
20 minutes;Off.  
[Off]  
Sets the length of time that the hard drive can be inactive before  
your notebook automatically turns off the power to the hard drive  
controller and drive motor. If you choose a factory installed  
combination of parameters this field will display the setting. If  
you choose to customize the parameters you will be able to set  
this yourself. The options available vary from Off, which has no  
inactivity shutoff, to 20 minutes.  
Video Timeout:  
Idle Mode:  
2 minutes to  
20 minutes; Off.  
[Off]  
[On]  
Sets the length of time without any user input device activity  
before the display is turned off. If you choose a factory combination  
of parameters,this field will display the setting. If you choose to  
customize the parameters, you will be able to set this yourself.Off  
has no inactivity shutoff.  
On; Off.  
Turns on and off the slow down of the CPU during periods of  
inactivity. When this is turned on the CPU clock slows by the  
amount set in the Advanced submenu when there is no activity  
for 16 seconds or more. Normal speed resumes automatically as  
soon as there is any activity.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-15 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Standby Timeout:  
1 minute to  
16 minutes; Off.  
[4 Minutes]  
Sets the length of time without any user input device activity  
before the CPU is set to half speed and the display and the hard  
drive are turned off. If you choose a factory combination of  
parameters this field will display the setting. If you choose to  
customize the parameters you will be able to set this yourself.  
Auto Suspend Timeout:  
Suspend Mode:  
5 to 60 minutes; Off.  
[15 Minutes]  
[Suspend]  
Sets the length of time without any I/O activity before your not  
book goes into Suspend mode. If you choose a factory combination  
of parameters this field will display that setting. If you choose to  
customize the parameters you will be able to set this yourself.Off  
has no inactivity suspension.  
Suspend; Save-to-Disk.  
Sets the form of suspension state. If you choose Suspend, you will  
suspend operation with power to system memory, and everything  
else powered down or in a very low power state. If you choose  
Save-to-Disk your notebook will save all of system memory and  
the operating parameters to the hard drive before turning your  
notebook to the pseudo-off condition.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
C A U T I O N  
P O I N T  
In Save-to-Disk mode there is no  
indication on the Status Indicator to let  
you know you are suspended rather than  
shut off from the power switch. You may  
want to make a habit of always trying  
the Suspend/Resume button before using  
the power switch.  
When resuming from a Save-to-Disk  
suspension there will be a delay while  
the contents of system memory and  
operating parameters are loaded from  
the hard drive.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-15 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Auto Save to Disk:  
Off; After 1 Hour.  
[Off]  
When set to After 1 Houryour notebook will automatically  
save all of system memory and the operating parameters to the  
hard drive and go to the pseudo-off if you leave your notebook in  
Suspend mode for an hour.  
Resume On  
Modem Ring:  
On;Off.  
[Off]  
Sets whether or not to Resume from a suspension state when a  
message is received by telephone line. This feature is not available  
if the Save-to-Disk mode is enabled. This feature applies to internal,  
external and PC Card modems.  
Resume On Time:  
Resume Time:  
On; Off.  
[Off]  
Sets whether or not to resume from a suspension state at a  
designated time. This feature is available from either the Suspend  
mode or the Save-to-Disk mode.  
Sets the designated time, on a 24-hour clock, when the notebook  
is to automatically resume operation from the Suspend state.  
The format of the clock setting is hours:minutes:seconds. Each  
segment of the time is set separately, either by incrementing or by  
typing in the numbers. You move between the segments with the  
Tab key or the Shift+Tab keys. This only applies when Resume on  
Time is set to On.  
Advanced Features:  
When selected, opens the Advanced Features submenu which  
allows setting additional power saving parameters.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Factory Installed Values for Power Saving Profiles  
Hard Disk Timeout  
Video Timeout  
Idle Mode  
Standby Timeout  
Auto Suspend Timeout  
Customized:  
Off  
Off  
On  
4 Minutes  
1 Minute  
15 Minutes  
Maximum  
30 Seconds  
2 Minutes  
On  
5 Minutes  
Power Savings:  
Maximum  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
15 Minutes  
Performance:  
Disabled:  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
Off  
Sample Customized Profile: 2 Minutes  
(To get even better  
1 Minute  
1 Minute  
5 Minutes  
battery life keep the  
display and volume  
settings as low as  
possible and use the  
sample customized profile.)  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Advanced Features  
Submenu of the Power Menu  
The Advanced Features submenu is for setting  
some non-time related power saving parame-  
ters. Follow the instructions for Navigating  
Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.  
(See page 59.)  
Table 3-16 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Advanced Features submenu,all of the  
options for each field, the default settings and  
a description of the field's function and any  
special information needed to help understand  
the field's use.  
Exiting from the Power Menu  
When you have finished setting the parameters  
on the Power menu, you can either exit from the  
Setup utility or move to another menu. If you  
wish to exit from Setup utility press the Esc key  
to go to the Exit menu. If you wish to move to  
another menu,use the cursor keys.  
Figure 3-16 Advanced Features Submenu  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-16 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Advanced Features Submenu of the Power Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
SUS/RES Switch:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
[Enabled]  
Sets the function of the Suspend/Resume button when your  
notebook is in an active state. The resume function can not  
be disabled as it works regardless of any other settings.  
Lid Closure Suspend:  
Lid Open Resume:  
On; Off.  
On; Off.  
[On]  
[On]  
Enables and disables having closure of the Display panel put your  
notebook in Suspend mode.  
Enables and disables having opening the Display panel acting as  
an automatic resume.  
AMU CPU Idle Mode:  
LCD Backlight Mode:  
Low Power; Standard.  
Low Power; Standard.  
[Low Power]  
[Standard]  
Sets the CPU speed during Idle mode.  
Sets the CPU speed during Video timeout and Lid Closure  
Suspend activation.  
Serial Mouse Activity:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
[Disabled]  
Enables and disables having activity on the serial port cause the  
system to reactivate from inactivity timeouts.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
BOOT MENU – SELECTING THE  
OPERATING SYSTEM SOURCE  
The Boot Menu is used to select the order  
in which the BIOS searches sources for the  
operating system.  
Table 3-17 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Boot menu,all of the options for each  
field, the default settings and a description of  
the field's function and any special information  
needed to help understand the field's use  
Figure 3-17 Boot Menu  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-17 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Boot Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
QuickBoot Mode:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
[Enabled]  
Turns on and off booting with a truncated set of Power On Self  
Test.(Fewer tests mean faster turn on.)  
Boot-time Diagnostic Screen: Enabled; Disabled.  
[Disabled]  
[Disabled]  
Turns on and off display of test results instead of Fujitsu logo  
screen during Power On Self Test.  
Preboot Execution  
Environment:  
Enabled; Disabled.  
Turns on and off the preboot execution environment feature.  
Boot Device Priority:  
Selects the Boot Device  
Priority submenu.  
This menu allows setting up the source for the operating system.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
The Boot Device Priority  
Submenu of the Boot Menu  
The Boot Device Priority Submenu is for set-  
ting the order of checking of sources for the  
operating system. Follow the instructions for  
Navigating Through the Setup Utility to make  
any changes. (See page 59.)  
Table 3-18 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Boot Device Priority submenu,all the  
options for each field, the default settings and  
a description of the fields function and any  
special information needed to help understand  
the fields use.  
Figure 3-18 Boot Device Priority Submenu  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-18 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Boot Device Priority Submenu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
1. Diskette Drive:  
–—  
–—  
The boot selections determine the order in which the BIOS  
searches for the operating system during a star tup sequence. To  
change the order highlight one source by using the up Õ, down  
Ô cursor keys and then press the + or - key to change the order  
number for that source. Be sure to save your changed order when  
you exit the BIOS setup utility.  
2. Hard Drive:  
–—  
–—  
–—  
3. ATAPI CD-ROM Drive: –—  
Exiting from Boot Menu  
When you have finished setting the boot para-  
meters with the Boot menu, you can either exit  
from the setup utility or move to another menu.  
If you wish to exit from the setup utility press  
the Esc key to go to the Exit menu. If you wish  
to move to another menu,use the cursor keys.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
INFO MENU – DISPLAYING  
BASIC SYSTEM INFORMATION  
The Info menu is a display only menu that  
provides the configuration information for  
your notebook.  
Table 3-19 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Info menu,all the options for each field,  
the default settings and a description of the  
field’s function and any special information  
needed to help understand the fields use.  
P O I N T  
The Asset Number is an optional user-  
entered field. An Asset Number can  
be entered through the use of third  
party software, such as LANdesk  
Client Manager.  
Figure 3-19 Info Menu  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-19 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Info Menu  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
BIOS Version:  
1.08  
BIOS Date:  
BIOS Area:  
CPU Type:  
CPU Speed:  
L1 Cache:  
05/06/1998  
E800h – FFFFh  
Pentium® II  
266 MHz  
32 KB  
L2 Cache:  
512 KB  
Total Memory:  
On Board:  
DIMM-1:  
32 MB  
32 MB SDRAM (ECC)  
Not Installed  
Not Installed  
None  
DIMM-2:  
Asset Number:  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
EXIT MENU – LEAVING  
THE SETUP UTILITY  
The Exit Menu is used to leave the setup  
utility. Follow the instructions for Navigating  
Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.  
(See page 59.)  
Table 3-20 shows the names of the menu fields  
for the Exit menu,all of the options for each  
field,the default settings and a description of  
the field's function and any special information  
needed to help understand the field's use.  
Figure 3-20 Exit Menu  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
Table 3-20 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Exit Menu.  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Exit Saving Changes:  
Selecting Exit Saving Changes will store all the entries on every  
menu of the setup utility to the BIOS memory and then exit the  
setup utility. A confirmation message Save configuration  
changes and exit now? [Yes] [No] will be displayed.  
Exit Discarding Changes:  
Load Setup Defaults:  
Selecting Exit Discarding Changes will exit the setup utility with  
out writing to the BIOS memory. When the BIOS recognizes this  
selection it will load the operating system and begin operation.  
A message Conguration has not been saved!  
Save before exiting? [Yes] [No]will be displayed.  
Selecting Load Setup Defaults will load the factory preset  
default values for all menu fields,then display the message  
Conrmation Load default configuration now?  
[Yes] [No]When confirmed the setup utility will return to the  
Exit Menu. To return to another menu follow the directions in the  
Navigating Through the Setup Utility Section. (See page 59.)  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
Table 3-19 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Exit Menu.  
Menu Field  
Options  
Default  
Description  
Discard Changes:  
Selecting Discard Changes will load the values in BIOS  
memory for all menu fields. Setup Confirmation Load  
previous configuration now? [Yes] [No]When  
confirmed the setup utility will return to the Exit menu. To  
return to another menu, follow the directions in the Navigating  
Through the Setup Utility Section. (See page 59.)  
Save Changes:  
Selecting Save Changes will cause the new settings in all menus  
to be written to the BIOS memory. Setup Confirmation  
Save configuration changes now? [Yes] [No]  
When confirmed the setup utility will return to the Exit menu.  
To return to another menu, follow the directions in the  
Navigating Through the Setup Utility section. (See page 59.)  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r i e s  
4. Re-allocate space and mark bad blocks in the  
space allocated to the Save-to-Disk function  
when a disk error has occurred.  
The screen will display the amount disk space  
needed to perform the Save-to-Disk function  
with the current memory configuration and  
how much unused space is available on the  
internal hard drive.  
SETTING UP YOUR  
SAVE-TO-DISK FILE ALLOCATION  
Your notebook comes with an allocation of space  
on the internal hard drive adequate to operate the  
Save-to-Disk function for the amount of memory  
installed at the factory. If you add a memory  
upgrade module or do not use the Save-to-Disk  
function and wish to free up the disk space, you  
will need to change your allocation. The utility to  
change the allocations is PHDISK.EXE and is  
activated from the MS-DOS prompt.  
5.Find out how much space is needed to  
perform the Save-to-Disk function with  
the current memory configuration and how  
much unused space is available on the  
internal hard drive.  
To find out details about the hard drive and  
the current Save-to-Disk space allocation, do  
the following:  
To find out how much space is needed to  
perform the Save-to-Disk function with the  
current memory configuration and how  
much unused space is available on the  
internal hard drive, do the following:  
1. Restart your notebook in MS-DOS mode.  
2. At the DOS prompt type CD C:\Fujitsu  
3. Type PHDISK /INFO  
PHDISK allows you to perform five different  
functions related to the Save-to-Disk space on  
your internal hard drive. They are:  
4. Press the Enter key.  
1. Restart your notebook in MS-DOS mode.  
2. At the DOS prompt type CD C:\Fujitsu  
3. Type PHDISK  
5. The screen will display the size of the space  
currently allocated to the Save-to-Disk func-  
tion and other parameters about the space  
and the hard drive.  
1. Allocate a space for the Save-to-Disk function.  
2. Remove all space allocation for the Save-to-  
Disk function.  
4. Press the Enter key.  
3. Find out details about the hard drive and the  
current Save-to-Disk space allocation.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
h
r
e
e
To remove all space allocation for the Save-to-  
Disk function, do the following:  
4. Press the Enter key.  
C A U T I O N  
5. The utility will create a Save-to-Disk file  
called SAVE2DSK.BIN in the root directory.  
It will be of the minimum size needed to  
support the Save-to-Disk function with the  
current memory configuration.  
Never use PARTITION in place of FILE  
with the PHDISK Utility or you will  
reformat your internal hard drive and all  
data, applications and operating system  
will be destroyed.  
1.Go to the Start Menu and select MS-DOS  
Prompt.  
2. Type CD C:\Fujitsu  
3. Type PHDISK /DELETE /FILE  
4. Press the Enter key.  
If you have had a read or write error when you  
tried to perform a Save-to-Disk operation you  
can re-allocate space to compensate for bad  
blocks on your drive. To do this:  
The utility will remove the space allocation for  
the Save-to-Disk function and free that space  
for other use.  
1.Go to the MS-DOS prompt.  
2. Type CD:\Fujitsu  
To create a space allocation for the Save-to-  
Disk function, do the following:  
3. Type PHDISK /REFORMAT /FILE  
4. Press the Enter key.  
1. Restart your notebook in MS-DOS mode.  
2. Type CD C:\Fujitsu  
5. The utility will re-create the Save-to-Disk file  
called SAVE2DSK.BIN with the same usable  
size and any bad blocks marked.  
3. At the DOS prompt type  
PHDISK /CREATE /FILE  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S e c t i o n  
F o u r  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
User Installable Features. . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Multi-function Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Optional Second Lithium ion Battery . . . . 123  
Optional Second Hard Drive . . . . . . . . 124  
PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Battery Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
MIDI/Joystick Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Theft Prevention Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Stereo Line In Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Headphones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Serial Port Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Parallel Port Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
USB Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Memory Upgrade Module . . . . . . . . . 134  
Optional LANdock or  
Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
A stereo line in jack on the right side of your  
notebook allows you to connect a sound  
source such as a cassette recorder.  
A docking port on the back of your notebook  
allows the connection of a Port Replicator  
or LANdock.  
SECTION FOUR  
USER INSTALLABLE FEATURES  
Your LifeBook 900 Series has a number of user  
installable features:  
A headphone jack on the right side of your  
notebook allows you to connect headphones  
or powered speakers.  
A serial port in the back of your notebook  
allows you to connect serial RS-232 devices,  
such as serial printers or serial scanners.  
PC Card slots in the left side panel of your  
notebook allow you to install PC Cards,IC  
memory cards (SRAM card) or Zoomed Video  
cards (Slot 1 only).  
A parallel port in the back of your notebook  
allows you to connect a parallel printer, a  
parallel photo or text scanner, etc.  
Two PS/2 ports on the right side of your  
notebook allow you to connect an external  
mouse and an external keyboard or  
numeric keypad.  
The dual warm-swappable Multi-function  
An external monitor port in the back of your  
notebook allows you to connect an external  
monitor.  
bays in the front of your notebook allow you  
to install the CD-ROM drive,the floppy disk  
drive,an optional second hard drive,an  
optional DVD drive, or an optional  
second Lithium ion battery.  
An external floppy disk drive port on the left  
side panel of your notebook allows the  
attaching of an optional external floppy disk  
drive. This allows you to use a floppy disk  
drive when the Multi-function bays are being  
used for other purposes.  
NTSC/PAL TV jacks and S-Video ports in the  
back of your notebook allow you to connect a  
TV or other video device to your notebook.  
A compartment in the bottom of your note-  
A MIDI/joystick port on the right side panel  
of your notebook allows you to connect  
MIDI music synthesizers, game joysticks and  
similar devices to your notebook.  
book allows you to install up to two memory  
upgrade modules.  
A dual USB port in the rear panel of your  
notebook allows you to connect Universal  
Serial Bus devices.  
A microphone jack on the right side of  
your notebook allows you to connect a  
mono microphone.  
An RJ-11 jack in the back of your notebook  
allows you to connect a telephone line to the  
internal modem.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
This section describes how to install and remove  
equipment for each of the expansion features.  
Bay 1 Devices  
Bay 2 Devices  
MULTI-FUNCTIONBAYS  
The bays on the front panel of your notebook  
accommodate the CD-ROM drive,the floppy  
disk drive,an optional second hard drive,an  
optional DVD drive, or an optional second  
Lithium ion battery.  
Floppy  
Disk Drive  
24x Max CD-ROM Drive  
Optional Second 3.0GB  
Hard Drive  
The Multi-function bays support a variety  
of configurations.  
Optional DVD Drive  
Multi-function Bay 1 supports:  
Optional Second  
Lithium ion Battery  
3.5" floppy disk drive (included).  
Figure 4-1 Multi-function Bay Modules  
Optional second Lithium ion battery  
(which must be purchased separately).  
Multi-function Bay 2 supports:  
C A U T I O N  
24-speed maximum CD-ROM drive (included).  
Do not use your notebook  
with either of the Multi-function bays  
empty. It may damage your notebook.  
Optional second 3.0GB hard drive  
(which must be purchased separately).  
Optional 1.5 max DVD drive  
(which must be purchased separately).  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
Multi-function Bay 1 Eject Lever  
Warm-swappable Devices in  
Removing a Device in either  
Multi-function Bay 1 and 2  
Multi-function Bay 1 or 2.  
Devices designed for use in Multi-function  
Bays 1 and 2 of your LifeBook 900 Series note-  
book computer are warm-swappable. Devices  
in either Multi-function Bay can be installed  
or removed while the system is in Suspend  
mode. In order to facilitate the warm-swap  
process, your notebook contains Tioman  
warm-swap software from Agaté. The Tioman  
software loads at system startup and displays  
an icon in the Status area at the right of the  
Windows 95 Taskbar.  
1. Close any open files on the removable device  
that you plan to eject from the computer, if a  
device is currently installed.  
2. Right-click the Tioman taskbar icon to  
display the menu.  
Connector for  
Multi-function  
Bay 1 Device  
3. Select the Swap Device menu item.  
4. When the notebook goes into the Suspend  
mode you can safely remove the device from  
the Multi-function bay.  
Multi-function Bay 1 Relese Button  
Figure 4-2 Removing and Installing a  
Device in Multi-function Bay 1  
To Remove a Device from Multi-function Bay 1  
This icon provides a visual cue for the currently  
inserted device. You will immediately notice  
whether a diskette drive,CD-ROM drive, hard  
drive, or even no device is inserted in the bay.  
Hover over the icon with the cursor to display  
the tooltip balloon, containing information on  
the inserted device. Right-click on the icon to  
display the Tioman menu. This menu offers  
additional functionality for swapping devices,  
getting help, as well as information on the  
Tioman software.  
C A U T I O N  
5. Slide the release latch on the left side panel  
toward the bottom of your notebook.  
Only one optional second battery is  
supported. Your notebook does not sup-  
port three (3) batteries simultaneously.  
6. While holding the release button in the  
release position use the Multi-function Bay 1  
Eject lever on the bottom of your notebook  
(Figure 4-2) to push the device toward the  
front of your notebook until the connector  
is disconnected.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
7. Slide the device forward until the unit is clear  
of the compartment.  
C A U T I O N  
Device Connector  
Release  
Be careful aligning and seating devices  
in the bay. If the fit is incorrect you may  
damage the bay or the device. If the  
device does not move easily, remove  
it, and check for dirt or foreign objects.  
It will require a firm push to latch the  
device in place.  
To Remove a Device from Multi-function Bay 2  
UP  
5. Slide the release button at the left rear corner  
of Multi-function Bay 2 toward the outer  
edge of your notebook.  
Multi-function  
Bay 2 Release  
Button  
Eject  
6. Twist the release button toward the front of  
your notebook until the device in the bay pops  
forward slightly.  
To Install a Device in either  
Multi-function Bay 1 or 2  
7. Grasp the device by the left corner and  
slide it forward until the device is clear  
of the compartment.  
1. If you are swapping a device your computer  
should already be suspended. If it is not, go  
through steps 1 to 4 of the previous section  
(Removing a Device in Multi-function  
Bay 1 or 2) to place your notebook in  
Suspend mode.  
C A U T I O N  
Multi-function Bay 2 Device  
Figure 4-3 Removing and Installing a  
Device in Multi-function Bay 2  
The front panel of the CD-ROM drive  
must be treated gently when removing the  
drive from the Multi-function bay or the  
drive can be damaged.  
2. Turn your notebook upside down with the  
bay openings toward you.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
5. Slide the device firmly toward the back of  
your notebook until it clicks into place.  
5. Slide the device toward the back of your  
notebook until it clicks into place. Make sure  
that the release button has fully returned to  
its latched position.  
C A U T I O N  
The system must be in Suspend mode  
before attempting to insert a device into  
either of the Multi-function Bays. Failure  
to do so can cause damage to your  
notebook or the device.  
6. Press the Suspend/Resume Button to reacti-  
vate the notebook from the Suspend mode.  
6. Press the Suspend/Resume Button to reacti-  
vate the notebook from the Suspend mode.  
7. The Tioman software will automatically  
detect the new device and place it online.  
7. The Tioman software will automatically  
detect the new device and place it online.  
Installing a Device in Multi-function Bay 2  
Installing a Device in Multi-function Bay 1  
3. Orient the device to be installed with the  
connector toward the body of your notebook  
and closer to the up side of the device.  
(Figure 4-3.)  
3.Orient the item to be installed with the con-  
nector toward the body of your notebook  
and the flat side of the device with the  
little metal square toward the body of  
your notebook.  
4. Align the grooves on the sides of the  
device with the tracks in the sides of the bay.  
(Figure 4-3.)  
4. Align the grooves on the side of the  
device with the tracks in the side of the bay.  
(Figure 4-2.)  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
3. Open the external floppy disk drive port  
cover on the left side panel of your notebook  
(Figure 4-6), by gently pulling on the front  
edge of the cover and swinging it toward the  
back of your notebook.  
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE  
For directions on installing a floppy disk  
drive see To Install or Remove a Device in  
Multi-function Bay 1, page 100. In addition an  
optional external floppy disk drive may be  
purchased and installed (page 103) for use when  
Multi-function Bay 1 is needed for other uses.  
(For information on the care and use of floppy  
disk drives see Floppy Disk Drive in Section Two  
on pages 34–36.)  
4. Align the external floppy disk drive cable  
with the smaller connector towards the body  
of your notebook with the wide side of the  
connector down. (Figure 4-6.)  
Figure 4-5 Floppy Disk Drive  
5. Insert the connector firmly into the port on  
your notebook until it clicks.  
To install a floppy disk drive externally, you must  
purchase an optional external floppy disk drive.  
C A U T I O N  
6. Insert the other cable connector into the  
back of the external floppy disk drive and  
press firmly until it clicks.  
The floppy disk drive must be installed or  
removed with the power off, unless you  
are swapping it in Multi-function Bay 1  
with the optional battery.  
To Connect An Optional  
External Floppy Disk Drive:  
1. Close all files and exit all applications.  
2. Turn off power to your notebook, close the  
display and remove the AC adapter. (See  
pages 24–25 for more information.)  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
5. Close the external floppy disk drive port  
cover on your notebook by swinging it  
toward the front of your notebook and  
pressing it into the side of your notebook  
until it latches.  
To Disconnect An Optional  
External Floppy Disk Drive:  
1. Close all files and exit all applications  
Port Cover  
2. Turn off power to your notebook, close  
the display and remove the AC adapter.  
(See pages 24–25 for more information.)  
Connector  
Release Buttons  
6. Squeeze the releases, on the sides of the  
external floppy disk drive cable connector  
next to the body of your external floppy  
disk drive, together.  
3. Squeeze the releases on the sides of the  
external floppy disk drive cable connector  
together. (The connector is next to the body  
of your notebook.) (Figure 4-6.)  
7. Pull the cable free.  
4. Pull the cable free.  
External Floppy  
Disk Drive  
External Floppy  
Disk Drive Port  
Figure 4-6 External Installation of a Floppy Disk Drive  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
The drive rotates the compact disk at a very  
high speed. Do not carry it around or subject  
it to shock or vibration with the power on.  
OPTIONAL SECOND  
CD-ROM DRIVE  
LITHIUM ION BATTERY  
Your CD-ROM drive can read CD-ROM and  
CD-Audio disks. Your CD-ROM drive is  
durable,however, you must treat it with care.  
Please pay attention to the following points:  
Your optional second Lithium ion battery is  
durable and long lasting but should not be  
exposed to extreme temperatures, high voltages,  
chemicals or other hazards. Batteries should be  
removed and stored separately in a cool dry  
place if your notebook is not going to be used  
for an extended period of time.  
Avoid using or storing the drive or CDs where  
they will be exposed to extreme temperatures.  
Avoid using or storing the drive or CDs  
where it is damp or dusty.  
Avoid using or storing the drive near  
magnets or devices that generate strong  
magnetic fields.  
Top  
Avoid storing the drive where it will be  
subjected to shock or vibration.  
Do not disassemble or dismantle the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Figure 4-7 CD-ROM Drive  
(See Section Two, pages 36–37, for guidance on  
loading a CD in your CD-ROM drive.)  
Figure 4-8 Second Lithium ion Battery  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
The optional second Lithium ion battery may  
be installed in Multi-function Bay 1 only. It is  
for use in a dual configuration with the main  
Lithium ion battery in the Battery bay and will  
operate in parallel with that battery.  
OPTIONAL SECOND HARD DRIVE  
Your optional second hard drive is a 3.0GB mod-  
ular unit that installs in Multi-function Bay 2 of  
your notebook. The first time that you use the  
optional modular hard drive after purchase, you  
will need to get your notebook to recognize it  
by opening the Windows 95 Control Panel and  
running Add New Hardware which will step you  
through the process of looking for your newly  
installed device and then you will need to format  
it. Check your operating system documentation  
for information on initializing a hard drive.  
C A U T I O N  
Under federal, state or local law it may  
be illegal to dispose of batteries by  
putting them in the trash. Please take  
care of our environment and dispose  
of batteries properly. Check with your  
local government authority for details  
regarding recycling or disposing of  
your old battery, or contact your  
support representative at  
C A U T I O N  
Only two batteries can operate at  
the same time. The optional second  
Lithium ion battery can operate  
alongside the main batery in  
Multi-function Bay 1.  
1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838 5487).  
C A U T I O N  
If the battery connector is not fully  
seated, you may not be able to use your  
notebook or to charge your battery.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
The optional second hard drive is durable,  
however, you must treat it with care. Please  
pay attention to the following points:  
C A U T I O N  
If you reformat the hard drive after it has  
been used ALL data and application soft-  
ware will be erased. Unless data is copied  
to floppy disks or other data storage  
media it will be permanently lost. All  
software will need to be re-installed and  
data files restored from your back-up  
disks. See the operating system manual  
for more information on backing-up  
your data files.  
The drive rotates the disk at very high speed.  
Do not carry it around or subject it to shock  
or vibration with the power on.  
Top  
Avoid using or storing the drive where it will  
be exposed to extreme temperatures.  
Avoid using or storing the drive where it is  
Figure 4-9 Second Hard Drive  
damp or dusty.  
Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets  
P O I N T  
or devices that generate strong magnetic fields.  
You will need to get Windows 95 to  
recognize your second hard drive every  
time you install it.  
Avoid storing the drive where it will be  
subjected to shock or vibration.  
Do not disassemble or dismantle the  
second hard drive.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
Caring for PC Cards  
Installing PC Cards in Your Notebook  
PC cards are installed in the PC Card slot in  
the left side panel of your notebook. Some PC  
Cards will not work when all possible devices  
are enabled. If a PC Card is not recognized, you  
will need to open the Control Panel, System  
and then Device Manager and choose a device  
to disable so that the resources can be used by  
the PC Card.  
PC CARDS  
PC Cards are durable; however, you must treat  
them with care. The documentation supplied  
with your PC Card will provide specific infor-  
mation; however, you should pay attention to  
the following points:  
PC Cards perform a wide variety  
of functions,and are ideal for  
mobile computers.  
Some available PC Cards:  
Fax/data modem cards (Type II).  
To keep out dust and dirt,store PC Cards in  
their protective sleeves when they are not in use.  
Local area network (LAN) cards (Type II).  
Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight  
Wireless LAN cards (Type II).  
or excessive heat.  
P O I N T  
1MB and 2MB static RAM (SRAM)  
Keep the cards dry.  
cards (Type I).  
Before you can use a Zoomed Video  
card, you must install the new version of  
the ATI Video Player for Windows 95  
software that comes with your note-  
book. (See section Two, pages 53-54  
for installation instructions.)  
Do not flex or bend the cards, and do not  
IDE solid-state disk cards (Type II).  
place heavy objects on top of them.  
SCSI cards (Type II).  
Do not force cards into the slots.  
Zoomed Video cards (Type II, Slot 1 only).  
Avoid dropping cards, or subjecting them to  
ATA cards (Type III).  
excessive vibration.  
Other PC cards that conform to PCMCIA 2.1  
or PC CardBus standards.  
For further information, refer to the instruc-  
tions supplied with your PC Card.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
PC Card Lock  
Eject Button Slot 2  
C A U T I O N  
C A U T I O N  
Do not insert a PC Card into a slot if there  
is water or any other substance on the  
card. If you do, you may permanently  
damage the card, your notebook, or both.  
Installing or removing a card while your  
notebook is in the process of going  
through the power on or power off  
sequence may damage the card and/or  
your notebook.  
To install a PC Card:  
3. Insert the PC Card in the card slot, with the  
product name label facing up. (Figure 4-11.)  
1. See your PC Card manual for instructions on  
installation of that specific card.  
PC Card  
Eject Button Slot 1  
4. When the card is installed,lock it in place  
by sliding the lock button to the right.  
(Figure 4-11.)  
2. Make sure that there is not already a PC Card  
in the slot you wish to use (1 or 2). If there is,  
eject it,as described in Removing PC Cards  
on page 128.  
Figure 4-11 Installing and Removing a PC Card  
C A U T I O N  
Some PC Cards can only be installed  
or removed with the power in Suspend  
mode or off. Please check the card  
documentation for correct usage.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
5. If the device cannot be removed  
message appears,save all files, close all  
applications,and exit Windows 95 and then  
shutoff the power with the power switch.  
(See Power Off on pages 24–25.)  
C A U T I O N  
C A U T I O N  
If the PC Card has an external connector  
and cable, do not pull on this cable when  
removing the card.  
Windows 95 has a shutdown procedure  
for PC Cards that must be followed  
before beginning to remove a card.  
6. Slide the PC Card lock to the left to allow  
removal of the PC Cards.  
Removing PC Cards  
If you wish to remove or replace the PC Card,  
use the following procedure:  
BATTERY BAY  
The Battery bay on the far right side of the  
front panel of your notebook holds the mian  
Lithium ion battery.  
7. Press the Eject button next to the card  
which you wish to remove. The button will  
pop out.  
1.Shutdown operation of the card.  
8. Press the Eject button again firmly and the  
PC Card will release and pop out a little.  
2. Click on the PC Card indicator on the  
Windows taskbar.  
Connector for Battery  
Battery Release Button  
9. Grasp the card by its body and remove it.  
From the PC Card Properties Window  
Finger Ridge  
10. If there is a PC Card still installed, relock it  
by sliding the PC Card lock to the right.  
3. Select the card to be removed and click on  
the Stop button.  
4. Verify that the You can safely  
remove your cardmessage appears.  
Main Battery  
Figure 4-12 Removing and Installing a Battery in  
the Battery Bay  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
To Install a Battery in the Battery Bay:  
MIDI/JOYSTICK DEVICES  
P O I N T  
To connect a MIDI/Joystick Device:  
4.Orient the battery to be installed with the  
finger ridge away from the body of your  
notebook and the connector toward the body  
of your notebook.  
The main battery should only be  
removed for storage or service.  
1. Close all files and exit all applications.  
2. Turn off power to your notebook, close the  
display and remove the AC adapter. (See pages  
24–25 for more information.)  
To Remove or Install a Battery  
in the Battery Bay:  
1. Close all files and exit all applications.  
5. Align the grooves on the side of the battery  
with the tracks in the side of the bay.  
(Figure 4-12.)  
3. Open the MIDI port cover on the right side  
panel of your notebook, (Figure 4-13), by  
gently pulling on the bott om edge of the  
cover and lifting it up.  
2. Turn off power to your notebook, close the  
display and remove the AC adapter. (See pages  
24–25 for more information.)  
6. Slide the battery toward the back of your  
notebook until it clicks into place. Make sure  
that the battery release button has returned to  
its base position against the side of the battery.  
4. Align the connector of the adapter cable with  
the connector towards the body of your note-  
book. (Figure 4-13.)  
3. Turn your notebook upside down with the  
bay openings toward you.  
C A U T I O N  
To Remove a Battery from the Battery Bay:  
5. Insert the connector firmly into the port on  
your notebook until it clicks.  
The main battery can not be  
warm swapped.  
4. Slide the battery release button on the bot-  
tom right side of the battery bay to your  
right. (Figure 4-12.)  
5. Slide the battery forward until it is clear of  
the compartment. This will require some  
force. Use the finger ridge on the bottom  
of the battery.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
6. Align the connector of the MIDI device and the  
adapter cable connector.  
6. Unscrew the locking screws on either side of  
the connectors for the MIDI device and the  
adapter cable.  
Connector to  
Connector  
Locking Screws  
7. Push the connectors together until seated and  
then tighten the screw locks on either side of  
the connectors.  
7. Pull the adapter cable free of the  
MIDI device.  
To Disconnect a MIDI/Joystick Device:  
1. Close all files and exit all applications  
THEFT PREVENTION LOCK  
A physical security system lock can be installed  
on the right side of your notebook. (See Figure  
1-5 on page 7 for the location of the lock slot.)  
Simply insert the key end of your security  
system in the slot, rotate 90 degrees and lock.  
(See Figure 1-5 on page 7.)  
2. Turn off power to your notebook, close the  
display and remove the AC adapter. (See  
pages 24–25 for more information.)  
Joystick  
3. Squeeze the releases on the sides of the MIDI  
device connector together. (The connector  
is next to the body of your notebook.)  
(Figure 4-13.)  
4. Pull the connector free.  
Port Cover  
Connector Release Buttons  
5. Close the port cover on your notebook by  
pushing it down and pressing it into the side  
of your notebook until it latches.  
Figure 4-13 Installing a MIDI/joystick Device  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
HEADPHONES  
MOUSE  
MICROPHONE  
Make sure that your stereo headphones are  
equipped with an 1/8" (3.5 mm) stereo mini-  
plug. The headphone jack is on the right side of  
your notebook. Make sure the plug is aligned  
and push it into the jack until fully seated.  
(See Figure 1-6 and page 7.)  
Make sure the connector on your device is the  
correct PS/2 type. The PS/2 ports are on the  
right side of your notebook. Align the arrow on  
the connector to point to the bottom of your  
notebook and push it in until the connector  
seats.A mouse may be installed and will be  
automatically recognized by your notebook  
without restarting or changing setups. (See  
Figure 1-6 on page 7.) A mouse may be installed  
in either PS/2 port.  
Make sure that your mono microphone is  
equipped with an 1/8" (3.5 mm) mono mini-  
plug. The microphone jack is on the right side  
of your notebook. Make sure the plug is aligned  
and push it into the jack until fully seated.  
(See Figure 1-6 on page 7.)  
TELEPHONE LINES  
STEREO LINE IN DEVICES  
To attach a telephone line to the internal modem  
open the rear panel connector cover or, with the  
cover closed, slide the panel in the connector  
cover slightly open to reveal the RJ-11 jack. Plug  
one end of the telephone cable into the tele-  
phone line outlet.Orient the telephone cable  
with the release latch on the connector up. Push  
it into the jack until it clicks and latches. (See  
Figure 1-7 on page 8.)  
Make sure that your stereo line in audio device,  
a cassette recorder, for example,is equipped  
with an 1/8" (3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. The  
stereo lin in jack is on the right side of your  
notebook. Make sure the plug is aligned and  
push it into the jack until fully seated.  
(See Figure 1-6 on page 7.)  
KEYBOARD  
Make sure the connector on your device is the  
correct PS/2 type. The PS/2 ports are on the  
right side of your notebook. Align the arrow on  
the connector to point to the bottom of your  
notebook and push it in until the connector  
seats.A keyboard or numeric keypad may be  
installed and will be automatically recognized  
by your notebook without restarting or  
changing setups. (See Figure 1-6 on page 7.)  
A keyboard or numeric keypad may be installed  
on either PS/2 port.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
SERIAL PORT DEVICES  
USB DEVICES  
C A U T I O N  
To connect an RS-232 device to the serial port  
on the rear panel of your notebook, be sure that  
the connector is the right size and aligned, then  
push in until it is fully seated. When it is seated,  
tighten the hold-down screws, one on each end  
of the connector. (See Figure 1-7 on page 8.)  
When installing a device on either of the USB  
ports on the rear panel of your notebook, be  
sure that the connector is the right size, aligned,  
and fully seated. (See Figure 1-7 on page 8.)  
The internal modem is not intended for  
use with Digital PBX systems. Do not  
connect the internal modem to a digital  
PBX as it may cause serious damage to the  
internal modem or your entire notebook.  
Consult your PBX manufacturer’s docu-  
mentation for details. Some hotels have  
Digital PBX systems. Be sure to find out  
BEFORE you connect your modem.  
C A U T I O N  
PARALLEL PORT DEVICES  
Due to ongoing changes in USB  
technology and standards, not all  
USB devices and/or drivers are  
guaranteed to work.  
To connect a parallel interface device to the  
parallel port on the rear panel of your note-  
book, be sure that the connector is the right  
size and aligned,then push in until it is fully  
seated. When it is seated tighten the screw  
locks on either end of the connector.  
(See Figure 1-7 on page 8.)  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
switch the display mode to TV output or set the  
display mode to TV with the BIOSsetup utility.  
(See Video Features submenu of the Advanced  
menu, pages 68–70.) S-Video generally provides  
better picture quality, but is only available on  
better TVs and VCRs.  
EXTERNAL MONITOR  
P O I N T  
You may install an external monitor in the  
external monitor port on the rear panel of your  
notebook. Make sure that the wide side of the  
connector is up and attach it to the port by  
pushing in until it is seated,then tighten the  
hold-down screw on each end of the connector.  
(See Figure 1-7 on page 8.)  
For information on using the S-Video in  
and Composite Video in jacks see  
Section Two, ATI Player, pages 52-54  
P O I N T  
P O I N T  
If you are using TV output in simultae-  
nous display modes (TV+CRT, TV+LCD,  
or TV+CRT+LCD) the top portion of the  
screen will be cut off. For optimal TV  
ouput usage set the display mode to  
"Television" only.  
TVs  
Pressing the F10 key while holding down  
the Fn key allows you to change your selec-  
tion of where to send your display video.  
Each time you press the combination of  
keys you will step to the next choice. The  
choices, in order, are: built-in display panel  
only, external monitor only, both display  
panel and external monitor, or TV output  
(NTSC/PAL or S-Video).  
Connect a TV or VCR to either the NTSC/PAL  
or the S-Video port depending on the selected  
output mode. Use either a standard RCA cable  
for NTSC (American TV Standard) or PAL  
(European TV Standard) output, or use a stan-  
dard S-Video cable for S-Video output. Make  
sure the connectors are the right size, aligned  
and fully seated. After connecting the cable,use  
the Fn/F10 key combination (see page 33) to  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
To Install Memory Upgrade Modules:  
MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE  
C A U T I O N  
Your notebook has 32MB of installed SDRAM.  
To increase your memory capacity you may  
install one or two memory upgrade modulesin  
the memory upgrade compartment in the bot-  
tom of your notebook.A memory upgrade  
module is a dual-in-line memory module  
(DIMM). You may add modules of different  
capacity. SDRAM memory upgrade modules are  
recommended but EDO Memory upgrade mod-  
ules will work. Installing an EDO Memory  
upgrade module will cause your system to  
operate at a slower rate.  
1. Turn off power to your notebook using the  
power switch, (see Power Off on pages 24–25),  
and remove any power adapter (AC or  
auto/airline).  
Memory upgrade modules can be  
severely damaged by electro-static  
discharge (ESD). Be sure your are  
properly grounded when handling  
and installing the module.  
2. Make sure that all the connector covers  
are closed.  
3. Turn the notebook bottom side up, with the  
front panel toward you.  
4. Remove the device in Multi-function Bay 2  
(see pages 118–119) and leave the connector  
in the ejected position.  
5. Remove the 4 screws of the memory  
upgrade compartment. (Figure 4-14.)  
C A U T I O N  
Figure 4-14 Opening the Memory  
Never remove screws except the ones  
specifically shown in the directions for  
installing and removing the memory  
upgrade module.  
Upgrade Compartment  
6. Remove the cover by gently lifting it by the  
notch in the front edge and pulling it toward  
the front of the notebook, being careful to  
not break the Multi-function Bay 2 Release  
button or the tabs on the end and side  
of the cover.  
7. Remove a memory upgrade module from its  
static guarded sleeve.  
8. Align the connector edge of the memory  
upgrade module with one of the two con-  
nector slots in the compartment. The notch  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
on the module should be on the right with  
the part side up and the connector pointing  
towards the back of the notebook and  
aligned with the notch in the connector  
inside the compartment. (Figure 4-15.)  
Memory upgrade modules are not something  
you routinely remove from your notebook.Once  
they are installed,leave them in place unless you  
want to increase system memory capacity.  
C A U T I O N  
9. Insert the memory upgrade module at a 45°  
angle. (Figure 4-16.) Press the connector  
edge of the module firmly down and into  
the connector.  
Before you install or remove a memory  
upgrade module, save changes, close all  
files and turn power off to your note-  
book. (See Power Off on Pages 24–25.)  
10. Press the memory upgrade module down  
into the compartment until it lodges under  
the retaining clip. You will hear a click when  
it is properly in place.  
11.Repeat for the second memory upgrade  
module if desired.  
Figure 4-15 Installing/Removing a  
Memory Upgrade Module  
12. Replace the cover by sliding the tabs on the  
rear edge of the cover in the slots in the rear  
edge of the compartment and pushing the  
cover gently down starting with the rear  
edge and working toward the front until the  
entire cover is flush with the bottom of your  
notebook. Make sure that the side tab o f the  
cover goes under the edge of the compart-  
ment and that the Multi-function Bay 2  
Release button moves freely.  
13. Replace the screws.  
14. Replace the device in Multi-function Bay 2.  
(See page 118.)  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
To Remove Memory Upgrade Modules:  
Checking the Computer Recognition  
of New Memory Capacity  
C A U T I O N  
1. Perform steps 1 through 6 of Installing  
Memory Upgrade Modules.  
When you have changed system memory capac-  
ity by adding or removing memory upgrade  
modules, be sure to check that your notebook  
has recognized all of the active memory. You  
can check memory capacity by looking at the  
Main Menu of the setup utility:  
Memory upgrade modules can be  
severely damaged by electro-static  
discharge (ESD). Be sure your are  
properly grounded when handling and  
removing the module.  
2. Pull clips sideways from each side of the  
memory upgrade module which you wish t o  
remove.(Figure 4-15).  
3. While holding clips out, remove the module  
from the slot by lifting it up and pulling  
towards the front of your notebook.  
1. Turn on power using the power switch.  
2. Enter the setup utility by pressing the F2 key  
as soon as the Fujitsu logo appears on the  
screen. (See page 54.)  
4.Store the memory upgrade module in a static  
guarded sleeve.  
5. Repeat the process for the second memory  
upgrade module as required.  
3. The System Memory and the Extended  
Memory capacity, as detected by your note-  
book during the Power On Self Test (POST),  
are displayed at the bottom of the Main  
Menu screen.  
6. Replace the cover by following the  
instructions in steps 12 through 14 of  
the instructions for Installing Memory  
Upgrade Modules, or install new memory  
upgrade modules and then replace the cover  
by following the instructions in steps 7  
through 14 of the instructions for Installing  
Memory Upgrade Modules.  
Example:A system with 32MB of memory  
will display 640K System Memory, 31M  
Extended Memory.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
If the total memory displayed is not what you  
believe it should be, check that your memory  
upgrade modules are properly installed; if  
properly installed and the capacity is not cor-  
rectly recognized. (See the Troubleshooting  
Section starting on page 146.)  
When you have installed additional memory,  
the display should change.  
For example for:  
Total RAM  
Installed  
System  
Memory  
Extended  
Memory  
32MB  
48MB  
640K  
640K  
640K  
640K  
640K  
640K  
640K  
640K  
31M  
48.5M  
64M  
64MB  
96MB  
97M  
112MB  
128MB  
144MB  
160MB  
112M  
128M  
144M  
160M  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
OPTIONAL LANDOCK OR  
PORT REPLICATOR  
The LANdock or Port Replicator  
(docking device) is powered from  
an AC adapter.  
Docking Connector  
Telephone Connector  
Docked LED  
Leveling  
Alignment Foot  
Ready to undock LED  
Undock Request Button  
Docking Release Lever  
C A U T I O N  
Follow the instructions that came  
with your LANdock or Port Replicator.  
The instructions and illustrations in this  
manual are only to serve as a guideline.  
The LANdock or Port Replicator manual  
that is included with the docking device  
supersede these instructions.  
Docking Alignment Pins  
Figure 4-17 LANdock Front View  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
7. Arrange the notebook/leveler combination to  
align the docking connector on the docking  
device body with the Docking port on your  
notebook and the notches on the leveler with  
the notches on the docking device body.  
(Figure 4-16.)  
LANdock  
To install your notebook in a LANdock:  
1. Put your notebook in Suspend mode or turn  
off the power.  
2. To use a docking device with your notebook  
they both must be on a flat surface.  
8. Push together firmly.  
3. Remove all connections from the rear panel of  
9. Lock in place by pulling the Docking Release  
lever forward.  
your notebook. (See Figure 1-7 on page 8.)  
4. Make sure that the adjustment feet are flat  
against the bottom of the notebook and the  
covers of the connectors, both rear panel and  
right side panel,are closed.  
10.Verify that docking is complete by checking  
that the LifeBook Docked LED is illuminated.  
(Figure 4-17.)  
11. Return your notebook to operation using  
the Suspend/Resume button or power  
switch,as appropriate. (When setting up the  
LANdock for the first time you must use the  
power switch.)  
5. Make sure that the slide cover in the rear  
panel is completely open.  
6. Set your notebook on the leveler, making  
sure that the alignment pins on the leveler  
(Figures 4-17 and 4-19) fit into the Docking  
Alignment receptacles in the bottom of your  
notebook. (Figure 1-8 on page 10.)  
Figure 4-16 Installing Your Notebook  
in a Docking Device  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
Connecting Devices to the  
LANdock or Port Replicator  
Undock Request Button  
Connect devices to your LANdock or Port  
Replicator in exactly the same way you would  
your notebook.Figure 4-18 shows the location of  
LANdock ports and jacks.Figure 4-20 shows the  
location of the Port Replicator ports and jacks.  
RJ-11 Jack  
RJ-45
MIDI/Joystick Port  
Dual USB Ports  
Ready to  
Undock LED  
External Monitor Port  
Docked LED  
To Remove Your Notebook  
from the LANdock  
1. From the Start menu click on Eject PC  
or press the Undock Request Button on  
the LANdock.  
External Floppy Disk  
Drive Port  
DC Power Jack  
Headphone Jack  
2. Wait for the Safe to Undock LED to illumi-  
nate and the system to go to Suspend mode,  
even if a message appears on your screen  
saying that you may undock.  
PS/2 Mouse Port  
PS/2 Keyboard Port  
Serial Port  
3. Push the lever on the side of the docking  
device backward until the docking device  
connectors are completely clear of  
your notebook.  
Parallel Port  
PC Card Slot  
Figure 4-18 LANdock Rear View  
4. Very carefully lift your notebook clear of the  
alignment pins in the bottom.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
To Remove Your Notebook  
from the Port Replicator  
1. Put your notebook in Suspend mode or  
turn off the power.  
Using Your Notebook  
P O I N T  
While it is Installed in the LANdock  
There are differences you will notice between  
using your notebook in and out of the  
LANdock. Note that Windows 95 has added to  
the Start menu,a PC Eject choice between the  
Suspend mode and Shutdown selections. Use  
the PC Eject choice to enable the undocking of  
your LifeBook.  
If the notebook power switch is turned  
off it is always safe to undock. You do  
not have to turn on your notebook and  
use the Eject PC feature for the LANdock  
or put your notebook in Suspend mode  
for the Port Replicator.  
2. Push the lever on the side of the station  
backward until the docking device  
connectors are completely clear of  
your notebook.  
3. Very carefully lift your notebook clear of  
the Port Replicator.  
With the LANdock you have  
added capabilities:  
C A U T I O N  
The RJ-11 connector on the rear of your  
docking device comes with a protective  
cover to keep the connector clean. Be  
careful to remove it before trying to make  
a connection. Save the cover and replace  
it when the connector is not in use.  
C A U T I O N  
In the Windows 95 Start menu there is a  
PC Eject choice between the Suspend mode  
and Shutdown selections.(Use the PC Eject  
choice to enable the undocking of  
your LifeBook.)  
You may lose information if you do not  
wait for the system to go to Suspend  
mode before removing your notebook  
from the docking device  
Both an external mouse and an external  
keyboard can be connected at the same  
time. Be sure to plug them into the correct  
PS/2 ports.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
5. To use the entire screen:  
There is a fast Ethernet port.  
P O I N T  
a. Go to the Start Menu.  
b. Select Settings.  
c. Select Control Panel.  
d. Select the Display icon by double-  
clicking on it.  
e. Select the settings taband change  
the resolution to 1024 x 768 pixels.  
f. Change the monitor setting to Laptop  
Display Panel (1024 x 768.)  
g. Click on the OK button to activate the  
new display settings. Your display should  
now occupy the entire screen.  
There are two additional PC  
Card slots.  
Your notebook comes with the docked  
configuration created. You only need to  
create the docked configuration if you  
modify the default hardware profiles and  
are using a LANdock.  
Using Your Notebook  
While it is Installed in the Port Replicator  
There are a no differences you will notice  
between using your notebook in and out of  
the Port Replicator.  
Creating the Windows 95 Docked  
Configuration (LANdock only)  
1. Install your notebook in the LANdock.  
C A U T I O N  
When your notebook is mounted in the  
LANdock or Port Replicator it is essentially  
a desktop PC not a mobile notebook. DO  
NOT unplug the docking device with the  
operating system active. You may cause a  
loss of data and a system error when you  
restart your notebook.  
2. Turn on the power. The operating system  
will automatically begin to configure itself  
for “docked mode” operation.  
Future docking with Windows 95 can be done  
in Suspend mode, Save-to-Disk mode or with  
the power off. The system will automatically  
detect whether you are docked, or not, when  
you resume operation. Undocking should only  
be done with power off or in PC Eject mode  
for the LANdock or Suspend mode for the  
Port Replicator.  
3. When the configuring is complete the screen  
will tell you to restart your system.  
4. When the restart is complete a little box will  
appear indicating that you are in the docked  
configuration but the display will not use  
the entire screen.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
Docking Connector  
Telephone Connector  
Leveling  
Alignment Foot  
Docking Release Lever  
Docking Alignment Pins  
Figure 4-19 Port Replicator Front View  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
u
r
RJ-11 Jack  
External Monitor Port  
DC Power Jack  
External Floppy Disk  
PS/2 Mouse Port  
Drive Port  
PS/2 Keyboard Port  
Serial Port  
Parallel Port  
Figure 4-20 Port Replicator Rear View  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S e c t i o n  
F i v e  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Identifying the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Specific Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Power On Self Test Messages . . . . . . . . 166  
Emergency CD-ROM Drive Tray Release . . 169  
Modem Setup and Commands . . . . . . . 169  
Restoring Your Pre-Installed Software  
From CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
3. Make sure that any card installed in the PC  
Card slot is seated properly. You can also  
remove the card from the slot,thus eliminat-  
ing it as a possible cause of failure.  
SECTION FIVE  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
C A U T I O N  
Do not return a failed notebook to  
your supplier until you have talked to  
a support representative.  
The LifeBook 900 Series from Fujitsu is  
sturdy and subject to few problems in the field.  
However, you may encounter simple setup or  
operating problems that you can solve on the  
spot, or problems with peripheral devices,that  
you can solve by replacing the device. The  
information in this section helps you isolate  
and resolve some of these straightforward prob-  
lems,and identify failures that require service.  
4. Make sure that any devices connected to the  
external connectors are plugged in properly.  
You can also disconnect such devices,thus  
eliminating them as possible causes of failure.  
8. If you have tried the solutions suggested in  
Specific Problems without success, contact  
your support representative:  
toll free 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487)  
FAX 1-901-259-5700  
5. Turn on your notebook using the power  
switch. Make sure it has been off at least 10  
seconds before you turn it on.  
e-mail 8fujitsu@fpc.fujitsu.com  
IDENTIFYING THE PROBLEM  
If you encounter a problem, go through the  
following procedure before pursuing complex  
troubleshooting:  
6.Go through the boot sequence.  
Web Site http://www.8fujitsu.com.  
7. If the problem has not been resolved, refer to  
the problem guide table, which follows, for  
more detailed troubleshooting information.  
(Page 147 has an index to the table.)  
Before you place the call, you should have  
the following information ready so that the  
customer support representative can provide  
you with the fastest possible solution:  
1. Turn off your notebook using the power  
switch on the right side panel.  
Product name.  
2. Make sure the AC adapter is plugged  
into your notebook and to an active AC  
power source.  
P O I N T  
Product configuration number.  
If you keep notes about what you have  
tried, your support representative may be  
able to help you more easily by giving  
additional suggestions over the phone.  
Product serial number.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Purchase date.  
notebook. Your support representative will then  
use the service computer to call your notebook  
and perform diagnostic tests to find the nature  
of your problem. Messages will be displayed on  
the screen explaining what is being done and  
giving any instructions that you need.  
Problem  
Page  
Conditions under which the  
problem occurred.  
Audio Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
CD-ROM Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
Docking Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
Floppy Disk Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
Hard Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
Keyboard or Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . .151  
Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152  
Modem Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153  
Parallel, Serial,and USB Device Problems . .153  
PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154  
Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155  
Shutdown and Startup Problems . . . . . . . . .161  
Video Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163  
Miscellaneous Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165  
Any error messages that have occurred.  
Hardware configuration.  
User Problem Guides  
Type of printer connected,if any. See the Unit  
Label on the bottom of your notebook for  
configuration and serial numbers. (Refer to  
Figure 1-8 on page 10.)  
When you have problems with your notebook,  
try to find the symptoms under the Symptom  
column of the table for the feature giving you  
difficulty. You will find a description of com-  
mon causes for that symptom under the col-  
umn Possible Cause and what,if anything, you  
can do to correct the condition under Possible  
Solution. Remember that it helps to keep notes  
of what you have tried and the results when you  
are troubleshooting.  
SPECIFIC PROBLEMS  
Using PC-Doctor  
PC-Doctor is a diagnostic program by  
Watergate Software, Inc. which comes pre-  
installed on your notebook. If your are an expe-  
rienced computer user you may find it useful,  
however, it is intended primarily to help your  
Fujitsu support representative better serve you.  
When you call for help your support represen-  
tative may ask you to set up your notebook for  
modem operation. You will be told what to do  
step by step, and then to hang up the phone  
and plug your phone line into the back of your  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
Symptom  
Audio Problems  
There is no sound coming from the  
built-in speakers.  
1. The volume knob is turned too low.  
1. Adjust the volume control knob on the  
right side of your notebook.  
2. The software volume control is set too low.  
2. Adjust the sound volume control settings  
in your software, both operating system  
and applications.  
3. Headphones are plugged into your notebook.  
4. Software driver is not configured correctly.  
3. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in  
speakers, remove the headphones.  
5. Refer to your application and operating  
system documentation for help.  
CD-ROM Drive Problems  
Notebook fails to recognize CD-ROM.  
1. Shipping card is still in the CD-ROM drive tray. 1. Remove shipping card and replace  
CD in tray.  
2. CD-ROM is installed with label face down.  
2. Open CD-ROM tray and re-install  
CD with proper orientation.  
3. Open CD-ROM tray and re-install  
CD properly.  
3. CD-ROM is not pushed down onto raised  
center circle of drive.  
4. CD-ROM tray is not latched shut.  
4. Push on the front of the CD-ROM tray  
until it latches.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
5. Setup utility is set to something other  
than CD-ROM for the Secondary  
Master Controller.  
5. Revise BIOS settings to set the Secondary  
Master correctly. (See Main menu and  
Secondary Master submenu pages 60–61  
for more information.)  
6. Wrong drive designator was used for  
CD-ROM in the application.  
6. Verify the drive designator used by the  
application is the same as the one used by  
the operating system. When the operating  
system is booted from a CD-ROM drive  
designations are automatically adjusted.  
(See Boot Options submenu on page 106.)  
7. Start the CD from the desktop or applica-  
tion software or re-enable the Windows CD  
auto insertion function. (See CD-ROM  
Drive Access Indicator on pages 21–22 for  
more information.)  
7. Windows CD auto insertion function  
is disabled.  
The CD-ROM Access indicator on the Status  
Indicator panel blinks at regular intervals when  
no CD is in the tray or the CD-ROM drive is  
not installed.  
1. The Windows CD auto insertion function  
is active and is checking to see if a CD  
is ready to run.  
1. This is normal. You can disable this  
function if you wish. (See CD-ROM Drive  
Access Indicator on pages 21–22 for  
more information.)  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
Symptom  
Docking Problems  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
Notebook does not turn on when installed in a  
LANdock or Port Replicator.  
1. LANdock or Port Replicator  
AC adapter is not plugged in.  
1. Provide power to the LANdock  
or Port Replicator.  
2. Notebook is not properly seated in the  
LANdock or Port Replicator.  
2. Remove and re-dock your notebook and  
verify that the Docked LED illuminates.  
Floppy Disk Drive Problems  
You cannot access your floppy disk.  
1. Security is set to protect access to floppy  
disk data.  
1. Verify your password and security settings.  
2. Floppy disk is not loaded correctly.  
2. Eject floppy disk, check orientation and  
re-insert. (See Floppy Disk Drive on  
pages 34–36.)  
3. BIOS setup utility has Diskette Controller:  
Disabled.  
3. Revise the setup utility I/O Device  
Configuration Submenu settings.  
(See Main Menu on pages 71–76.)  
4. Remove and re-install your floppy disk  
drive. (See Multi-function Bay 1 on page  
117, or External Installation of a Floppy  
Disk Drive on page 121.)  
4. The floppy disk drive may not be  
properly installed.  
5. You tried to write to a write protected  
floppy disk.  
5. Eject the floppy disk and set it to write  
enabled. (See pages 35–36.)  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
Hard Drive Problems  
You can not access your hard drive.  
1. The setup utility is set to something other than 1. Revise BIOS settings to set the Primary  
the characteristics of your internal hard drive.  
Master correctly. (See Main Menu and  
Primary Master Submenu pages 63–65  
for more information.)  
2. The wrong drive designator was used by an  
application when a bootable CD-ROM was  
used to start the notebook.  
2. Verify drive designator used by application  
is in use by the operating system. When  
the operating system is booted from a  
CD-ROM,drive designations are automa-  
tically adjusted. (See Primary Master Submenu  
on pages 63–65.)  
3. Security is set so the operating system can  
not be started without a password.  
3. Verify your password and security settings.  
(See Security menu on pages 90–95.)  
Keyboard or Mouse Problems  
The built-in keyboard does not seem to work.  
1. The notebook has gone into Suspend mode.  
1. Push the Suspend/Resume button.  
2. Your application has locked out your keyboard. 2. Try to use the ErgoTrac pointing device to  
access the Start menu and then the Shut-  
Down menu and restart the System. If this  
fails then turn your notebook off,wait 10  
seconds or more, and then turn it on using  
the power switch.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
You have installed an external keyboard or mouse, 1. Your external device is not properly installed.  
and it does not seem to work.  
1. Re-install your device. (See Mouse or  
Keyboard on page 131.)  
2. Your operating system software is not setup  
2. Check your device and operating  
system documentation and activate the  
proper driver.  
with the correct software driver for that device.  
You have connected an external keyboard or a  
mouse and it seems to be locking up the system.  
1. Your operating system software is not setup  
with the correct software driver for that device.  
1. Check your device and operating  
system documentation and activate the  
proper driver.  
2. Your system has crashed.  
2. Restart your system by shutting down  
and/or turning off the power, waiting  
at least 10 seconds and then turning the  
power on again.  
Memory Problems  
Your power on screen or Main menu of the BIOS 1. Your memory upgrade module is not  
1. Remove and re-install your memory  
upgrade module. (See Memory Upgrade  
Module on pages 134–136.)  
setup utility information does not show the  
correct amount of installed memory.  
properly installed.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
2. You have a memory failure.  
2. Make sure display of error messages is  
enabled (see Boot Options Submenu on  
pages 106–107), and check for Power On Self  
Test (POST) messages. (See pages 166–168  
for possible messages and their meanings.)  
Modem Problems  
Messages about modem operation.  
1. Messages about modem operation are  
generated by whichever modem application  
is in use.  
1. See your application software documenta-  
tion for additional information.  
Parallel, Serial,and USB Device Problems  
You have installed a parallel-port device,a serial-  
port device or a USB device. Your notebook does  
not recognize the device, or the device does not  
seem to work properly.  
1. The device is not properly installed.  
1. Remove and re-install the device.  
(See Parallel Port Devices on page 132, Serial  
Port on Devices on page 132, or USB Devices  
on page 132.)  
C A U T I O N  
Due to ongoing changes in USB technology  
and standards, not all USB devices and/or  
drivers are guaranteed to work.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
2. The device may have been installed with an  
application running and your notebook  
doesn’t know its there.  
2. Close your application and restart  
your notebook.  
3. Your software may not have the correct  
software driver active.  
3. See your software documentation and  
activate the correct driver.  
4. You may have the wrong I/O address selected  
for your device.  
4. See your device documentation and software  
documentation to determine the required  
I/O address.  
5. Your device and another device are assigned  
the same I/O address.  
5. Check all I/O addresses in the BIOS setup  
utility and your other installed hardware  
and software and make sure there are no  
duplications.  
PC Card Problems  
A card inserted in the PC Card slot does not  
work or is locking up the system.  
1. The card is not properly installed  
1. Remove and re-install the card.  
(See PC Cards on pages 126–128.)  
2. Close your application and restart  
your notebook.  
2. The card may have been installed with an  
application running and your notebook  
doesn’t know its there.  
3. Your software may not have the correct  
software driver active.  
3. See your software documentation and  
activate the correct driver.  
4. You may have the wrong I/O address selected  
for your PC Card device.  
4. See your PC Card documentation to  
determine the required I/O address.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
5. Your PC Card device and another device are  
assigned the same I/O address.  
5. Check all I/O addresses in the BIOS setup  
utility and your installed hardware and  
make sure there are no duplications.  
Power Failures  
You turn on your notebook and nothing seems  
to happen.  
1. The installed main battery is completely  
discharged,there is no optional second battery  
installed and there is no power adapter (AC or  
auto/airline) installed.  
1. When all the batteries are dead there will be  
a beep when the power switch is turned on  
and the notebook will immediately go into  
Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See pages  
28–29.) Check the Status Indicator panel to  
determine the presence and condition of  
the batteries. (See pages 19–21.) Install the  
primary battery if it is not installed or a  
Power adapter if all batteries are dead or  
unavailable.(See pages 11, 128–129.)  
2. The main battery is installed but is completely  
discharged,there is no optional second battery  
installed and the power adapter (AC or auto/  
airline) is not plugged in properly.  
2. When the batteries are dead there will be a  
beep when the power switch is turned on and  
the notebook will immediately go into Dead  
Battery Suspend mode. (See page 28–29.)  
Check the Status Indicator panel to deter-  
mine the presence and condition of the  
batteries and adapter. (See Figures 2-3 and  
2-4 on pages 19–20.) Verify that your adapter  
is connected correctly. (See page 11.)  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
3. The main battery is installed but is completely  
discharged,there is no optional second battery  
installed and the power adapter (AC or auto/  
airline) has no power from the AC outlet,  
3. When the battery is dead there will be a  
beep when the power switch is turned on  
and the notebook will immediately go into  
Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See page  
28–29.) Check the Status Indicator panel to  
determine the presence and condition of the  
batteries and adapter. (See Figures 2-3 and  
2-4 on pages 19 and 21.) Move the AC cord to  
a different outlet, check for a line switch or  
tripped circuit breaker for the AC outlet,if  
you are using an auto/airline adapter in a car  
make sure the ignition switch is in the On or  
Accessories position.  
airplane seat jack, or the cars cigarette lighter.  
4. The main battery is installed but is completely  
discharged,there is no optional second battery  
installed and the power adapter (AC or auto/  
airline) is faulty.  
4. When the battery is dead there will be a  
beep when the power switch is turned on  
and the notebook will immediately go into  
Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See page 28–29.)  
Verify the cause using the Status Indicator  
panel to determine the presence and con-  
dition of the batteries and adapter. (See  
Figures 2-3 and 2-4 on pages 19 and 21.) Try a  
different power adapter or install a charged  
optional second battery.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
5. Power switch is already in the On position.  
5. Try the Suspend/Resume button. If that  
doesn’t work,slide your power switch firmly  
to the front, pause 10 seconds or more and  
then firmly to the rear. If you shut down  
your notebook from Windows 95, you are  
really in a pseudo-off state,there is some  
power on and you can restart with the  
Suspend/Resume button. (See Power Off  
on pages 24–25)  
6. There is no battery installed and there is no  
power adapter (AC or auto/airline) installed.  
6. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify the  
presence and condition of the batteries.  
(See Figure 2-3 on page 19.) Install a Power  
adapter or install a battery in Multi-function  
Bay 2 in the front of your notebook. (See  
Multi-function Bay Devices on pages 117–120.)  
If the battery is not charged use a Power  
adapter until it is charged.  
7. The main battery is installed but is faulty,  
there is no optional second battery installed  
and there is no power adapter (AC or auto/  
airline) installed.  
7. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify  
the presence and condition of the batteries.  
(See Figure 2-3 on page 19.) If a battery is  
indicating a short, remove that battery  
and operate from another power source  
or replace that battery.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
8. The battery or batteries are low.  
8. If the batteries are dead there will be a beep  
when the power switch is turned on and the  
notebook will immediately go into Dead  
Battery Suspend mode. (See pages 28–29.)  
Check the Status Indicator panel to determine  
the presence and condition of the batteries.  
(See Figure 2-3 on page 19.) Use a power  
adapter to operate until a battery is charged  
or install a charged battery.  
Your notebook turns off all by itself.  
1. The power management parameters are set for 1. Use the keyboard or pointer and if that does  
auto timeouts which are too short for your  
operating needs.  
not restore operation,push the Suspend/  
Resume button. Check the PowerPanel set-  
tings or close your applications and go to  
the setup utility Power Savings menu and  
adjust the timeout values to better suit your  
operation needs. (See the PowerPanel on  
pages 41–44 and Power Savings Menu on  
pages 96–102.)  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
2. You are operating on battery only and have  
ignored a low battery alarm until the batteries  
are all at the dead battery state and your  
into Dead Battery Suspend mode.  
2. Install a Power adapter and then push the  
Suspend/Resume button. (See Low Battery  
State on pages 28–29.) machine has gone  
3.You have a battery failure.  
3. Verify the condition of the batteries using  
the Status Indicator panel (Figure 2-3 on  
page 19), and replace or remove any that  
are shorted.  
4. Your power adapter has failed or lost its  
power source.  
4. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the  
outlet has power.  
Your notebook wont work on battery alone.  
1. The installed batteries are dead.  
1. When the batteries are dead there will be a  
beep when the power switch is turned on  
and the notebook will immediately go into  
Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See pages  
28–29.) Replace the battery with a charged  
one or install a Power adapter.  
2. No batteries are installed.  
2. Install a charged battery. (See Multi-function  
Bay Devices on pages 117–120 and Battery  
Bay on pages 128–129.)  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
3. The batteries are improperly installed.  
3. Verify that the batteries are properly con-  
nected by re-installing them. (See Multi-  
function Bay Devices on pages 117–120 and  
Battery Bay on pages 128–129.)  
4. Your installed batteries are faulty.  
4. Verify the condition of the batteries using  
the Status Indicator panel (Figure 2-3 on  
page 19.) and replace or remove any that  
are shorted.  
The batteries seem to discharge too quickly.  
1. You are running an application which uses a  
great deal of power because of frequent hard  
drive access or CD-ROM access, use of a  
modem PC Card or of a LAN PC Card.  
1. Use both the main battery and an optional  
second battery and/or use a power adapter  
for this application when at all possible.  
2. The power savings features may be disabled.  
2. Check the PowerPanel and/or setup  
utility settings in the Power Savings menu  
(see pages 41–44 and 96–102), and adjust  
according to your operating needs.  
3. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The  
higher the brightness the more power your  
display uses.  
3. The brightness is turned all the way up.  
4. The batteries are very old.  
5. The batteries have been exposed to high  
temperatures.  
4. Replace the batteries.  
5. Replace the batteries.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
6. The batteries are too hot or too cold.  
6. Restore the notebook to normal operating  
temperature. (The Charging indicator on  
the Status Indicator panel will flash when  
the battery is outside its operating range.)  
(See Batteries on page 26.)  
Shutdown and Startup Problems  
The Suspend/Resume button does not work.  
1. The Suspend/Resume button is disabled from  
the Advanced submenu of the Power Savings  
menu of the setup utility.  
1. Enable the button from the setup utility.  
(See page 102.)  
2. You did not hold the button in long enough.  
2. Hold the button longer. This may need to  
be a very long time if your application is  
preventing the CPU from checking for  
button pushes.  
3. There may be a conflict with the  
application software.  
3. Close all applications,and try the  
button again.  
The system powers up, and displays the  
power on information, but fails to load the  
operating system.  
1. The boot sequence settings of the setup utility 1. Set the operating source by pressing the Esc  
are not compatible with your configuration.  
key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use  
the F2 key and enter the setup utility and  
adjust the source settings from the Boot  
menu on pages 106–107.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
2. You have a secured system requiring a  
password to load your operating system.  
2. Make sure you have the right password.  
Enter the setup utility and verify the  
Security settings and modify them as appro-  
priate. (See Security Menu on pages 90–92.)  
3. Use the BIOS setup utility Main menu,  
Primary Master submenu to try to auto  
detect the internal hard drive.  
3. Internal hard drive was not detected.  
(See pages 63–65.)  
An error message is displayed on the screen  
during the notebook turn on (boot) sequence.  
1. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected  
a problem.  
1. See the Power On Self Test (POST) Messages  
(pages 166–168) to determine the meaning  
and severity of the problem. Not all  
messages are errors; some are simply  
status indicators.  
Your notebook appears to change setup  
parameters when you start it.  
1. BIOS setup changes were not saved when you  
made them and exited the BIOS setup utility  
thus returning to previous settings.  
1. Make sure you select Save Changes  
And Exitwhen exiting the BIOS  
setup utility.  
2. The BIOS CMOS hold-up battery has failed.  
2. Contact your support representative for  
repairs. This is not a user serviceable part  
but has a normal life of 3 to 5 years.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
Video Problems  
The built-in display is blank when you turn on  
your notebook.  
1. Something is pushing on the Closed Cover  
switch. (See Figure 1-7 on page 8.)  
2. The notebook is set for an external  
monitor only.  
1. Clear the Closed Cover switch.  
2. Pressing F10 while holding down the Fn key  
allows you to change your selection of where  
to send your display video. Each time you  
press the combination of keys you will step  
to the next choice. The choices,in order, are  
built-in display only, external monitor only,  
both built-in display and external monitor.  
3. Move the display and the brightness control  
until you have adequate visibility.  
3. The angle of the display and the brightness  
settings are not adequate for your  
lighting conditions.  
4. The power management timeouts may be  
set for very short intervals and you failed to  
notice the display come on and go off again.  
4. Press any key or move the pointer, if this  
doesn’t work press the Suspend/Resume  
buttton. (The display may be shut off  
by Standby mode, Auto Suspend, or  
Video Timeout.)  
5. The notebook turned on with a series of beeps. 5. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected  
a failure which does not allow the display  
to operate. Contact your support  
representative.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
The display goes blank by itself after you have  
been using it.  
1. The notebook has gone into Video timeout,  
Standby mode, Suspend mode or Save-to-Disk  
mode because you have not used it for a period  
of time.  
1. Use the keyboard or pointer and if that does  
not restore operation,push the Suspend/  
Resume button. You may want to change  
your PowerPanel settings (pages 41–44) or  
close your application and go to the setup  
utility Power Savings menu (pages 96–101)  
and adjust the timeout values to b etter suit  
your operation needs.  
2. Something is pushing on the Closed Cover  
switch. (See Figure 1-7 on page 8.)  
2. Clear the Closed Cover switch.  
3. The power management timeouts may be  
set for very short intervals and you failed to  
notice the display come on and go off again.  
3. Press any key or move the pointer, if this  
doesn’t work press the Suspend/Resume  
button.  
The Built-in Display does not close.  
1. A foreign object, such as a paper clip, is stuck  
between the display and the keyboard.  
1. Remove all foreign objects from the  
keyboard.  
The Built-in Display has bright or dark spots.  
1. If the spots are very tiny and few in number,  
this is normal for a large LCD display.  
1. This is normal; do nothing.  
2. If the spots are numerous or large enough to  
interfere with your operation needs.  
2. Display is faulty; contact your support  
representative.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
The application display uses only a portion of  
your screen and is surrounded by a dark band.  
1. You are running an application that does not  
support 1024 x 768 pixel resolution display  
and display compression is enabled.  
1. Display compression gives a clearer but  
smaller display for applications that do not  
support 1024 x 768 pixel resolution. You can  
fill the screen but have less resolution by  
changing your display compression setting,  
(See Video Features Submenu of the Advanced  
Menu on pages 78–79.)  
You have connected an external monitor and it  
does not come on.  
1. Your BIOS setup is not set to enable your  
external monitor.  
1. Try toggling the video destination by  
pressing Fn and F10 together or check your  
BIOS setup and enable your external  
monitor. (See the Video Features Submenu  
of the Advanced Menu on pages 78–79.)  
2. Reinstall your device. (See External Monitor  
on page 9.)  
2. Your external monitor is not properly installed.  
3. Your operating system software is not setup  
with the correct software driver for that device.  
4. Your external monitor is not compatible with  
your notebook.  
3. Check your device and operating system  
documentation and activate the proper driver.  
4. See your monitor documentation and the  
External Monitor Support portions of  
Appendix A on page 176.  
Miscellaneous Problems  
An error message is displayed on the screen  
during the operation of an application.  
1. Application software often has its own set of  
error message displays.  
1. See your application manual and help dis-  
plays screens for more information. Not all  
messages are errors; some may simply be  
status information.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
BIOS Power On Self Test (POST) diskette tests.  
Check to see that the drive is defined with the  
proper diskette type in the Utility Setup, (see page  
59,) and that the diskette drive is installed cor-  
rectly, (see pages 121 and 122). If the disk drive is  
properly defined and installed avoid using it and  
contact your support representative.  
the map indicates a failed bit. This is a serious  
fault which might cause you to lose data if you  
continue. Contact your support representative.  
POWER ON SELF TEST MESSAGES  
The following is an alphabetic list of error-and-  
status messages which Phoenix BIOS and/or  
your operating system can generate and an  
explanation of each message.Error messages  
are marked with an *. Comments in italics  
are suggestions of possible actions for you to  
consider or risks resulting from ignoring the  
message. The most common errors are marked  
with a #. If an error message is displayed that is  
not in this list, write it down and check your  
operating system documentation both on  
screen and in the manual. If you can find no  
reference to the message and its meaning is not  
clear, contact your support representative  
for assistance.  
*Fixed Disk x Failure or Fixed Disk Controller  
Failure (where x = 1-4) – Fixed disk is not  
working or not configured properly. This may  
mean that the hard drive type identified in your  
Setup Utility does not agree with the type  
detected by the Power On Self Test (POST).  
Run the Setup Utility to check for the hard disk  
type settings and correct them if necessary. If the  
settings are OK and the message appears when  
you restart the system there may be a serious  
fault which might cause you to lose data if you  
continue. Contact your support representative.  
*Extended RAM Failed at offset:nnnn –  
Extended memory not working or not config-  
ured properly. If you have an installed a memory  
upgrade module verify that the module is proper-  
ly installed. If it is properly installed you may  
want to check your Windows Setup so it is not  
trying to use unavailable memory until you can  
contact your support representative.  
nnnn Extended RAM Passed – Where nnnn  
is the amount of memory in kilobytes  
successfully tested.  
*Incorrect Drive A type – run SETUP Type  
of floppy drive A: not correctly identified in  
Setup. This means that the floppy disk drive  
type identified in your Setup Utility does not  
agree with the type detected by the Power On  
Self Test (POST). Run the Setup Utility to  
correct the inconsistency.  
nnnn Cache SRAM Passed – Where nnnn  
is the amount of system cache in kilobytes  
successfully tested by the Power On Self Test  
(POST). (This can only appear if you have an  
SRAM PC Card installed.)  
*Failing Bits:nnnn – The hex number nnnn  
is a map of the bits at the memory address  
(in System, Extended, or Shadow memory)  
which failed the memory test. Each 1 (one) in  
*Diskette drive A error or Diskette drive B  
error – Drive A: or B:is present but fails the  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
*Incorrect Drive B type – run SETUP – Type  
of floppy drive B: not correctly identified in  
Setup. This means that the floppy disk drive  
type identified in your Setup Utility does not  
agree with the type detected by the Power On  
Self Test (POST). Run the Setup Utility to correct  
the inconsistency.  
*Keyboard error nn – BIOS discovered a stuck  
key and displays the scan code for the stuck key.  
You may have to replace your keyboard but may  
be able to use an external keyboard until then.  
Contact your support representative.  
*Parity Check 1 nnnn – Parity error found in  
the system bus.BIOS attempts to locate the  
address and display it on the screen. If it cannot  
locate the address,it displays ????. This is a  
potentially data destroying failure. Contact your  
support representative.  
*Monitor type does not match CMOS – Run  
SETUP – Monitor type not correctly identified  
in Setup. This error probably means your BIOS  
is corrupted, run the Setup Utility and set all set-  
tings to the default conditions. If you still get this  
error, contact your support representative.  
*Parity Check 2 nnnn – Parity error found in  
the I/O bus.BIOS attempts to locate the address  
and display it on the screen. If it cannot locate  
the address,it displays ????. This is a poten-  
tially data destroying failure. Contact your  
support representative.  
*Invalid VRAM media type – Problem with  
VRAM access. In the unlikely case that you  
see this message you may have some display  
problems. You can continue operating but  
should contact your support representative for  
more information.  
#*Operating system not found – Operating  
system cannot be located on either drive A: or  
drive C: Enter the Setup Utility and see if fixed  
disk and drive A: are properly identified and that  
the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have  
changed your installation greatly the operating  
system should be on drive C:. If the Setup Utility  
is correctly set your hard drive is probably  
corrupted and your system may have to be  
re-installed from your back up media.  
#*Press <F1> to resume,<F2> to SETUP – is  
displayed after any recoverable error message.  
Press the F1 key to continue the boot process or  
the F2 key to enter Setup and change any settings.  
*Keyboard controller error – The keyboard  
controller failed test. You may have to replace  
your keyboard or keyboard controller but may  
be able to use an external keyboard until then.  
Contact your support representative.  
#Press <F2> to enter SETUP – message is dis-  
played during Power On Self Test (POST). The  
message can be turned off by the Setup Utility  
Boot Options Submenu, (see pages 106–107), but  
the F2 key will still perform the same function.  
*Keyboard error – Keyboard not working. You  
may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard  
controller but may be able to use an external  
keyboard until then. Contact your support  
representative.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
#*Previous boot incomplete – Default con-  
figuration used – Previous Power On Self  
Test (POST) did not complete successfully.  
Power On Self Test (POST) loads default  
values and offers to run Setup. If the failure  
was caused by incorrect values and they are  
not corrected,the next boot will likely fail also.  
If using the default settings does not allow you to  
complete a successful boot sequence you should  
turn off the power with the Power Switch and  
contact your support representative.  
*System battery is dead – Replace and run  
SETUP – The BIOS CMOS RAM memory hold  
up battery is dead. This is part of your BIOS  
and is a board mounted battery which requires  
a support representative to change. You can con-  
tinue operating but you will have to use Setup  
Utility default values or reconfigure your Setup  
Utility every time you turn off your notebook.  
This battery has an expected life of 2 to 3 years.  
*System RAM Failed at offset:nnnn – System  
memory failed at offset nnnn of in the 64k  
block at which the error was detected. This  
means that there is a fault in your built-in mem-  
ory. If you continue to operate you risk corrupting  
your data. Contact your support representative  
for repairs.  
nnnn System RAM Passed – Where nnnn is the  
amount of system memory in kilobytes success-  
fully tested.  
System BIOS shadowed – System BIOS copied  
to shadow RAM.  
*System timer error – The timer test failed.  
The main clock that operates the computer is  
faulty. Requires repair of system board. Contact  
your support representative for repairs.  
*Real time clock error – Real-time clock fails  
BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact  
your support representative.  
*System CMOS checksum bad – run SETUP –  
BIOS CMOS RAM has been corrupted or mod-  
ified incorrectly, perhaps by an application pro-  
gram that changes data stored in BIOS memo-  
ry. Run Setup and reconfigure the system.  
*Shadow RAM Failed at offset:nnnn – Shadow  
RAM failed at offset nnnn of the 64k block at  
which the error was detected. You are risking  
data corruption if you continue. Contact your  
support representative.  
UMB upper limit segment address:nnnn –  
Displays the address of the upper limit of  
Upper Memory Blocks,indicating released  
segments of the BIOS memory which may  
be reclaimed by a virtual memory manager.  
nnnn Shadow RAM Passed – Where nnnn  
is the amount of shadow RAM in kilobytes  
successfully tested.  
Video BIOS shadowed – Video BIOS success-  
fully copied to shadow RAM.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L i f e B o o k 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F u j i t s u  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
When using the internal modem with applica-  
tions which are not factory installed see the  
application documentation.  
MODEM SETUP AND COMMANDS  
The operating system and application software  
that is factory installed detects the modem  
characteristics and provides the necessary com-  
mand strings to operate the modem. The inter-  
nal modem operation is controlled by generic  
AT commands from the operating system and  
application software. The standard long form  
result codes may, in some cases, be displayed on  
your screen to keep you informed of the actions  
of your modem. The operating system and  
application software may suppress display of  
the result codes. Examples of result codes are:  
Recovery Directions  
1. Put the Recovery CD-ROM in the  
CD-ROMdrive.  
2.Start your notebook.  
Figure 5-1 Emergency CD-ROM Tray Release  
3. Set the operating system source to be the  
CD-ROM drive.  
EMERGENCY CD-ROM DRIVE  
TRAY RELEASE  
4. Follow the instructions on your screen.  
5. When recovery is complete, remove the  
Recovery CD-ROM, replace it in its sleeve  
and store it.  
If for some reason the eject button fails, you  
can open the disk tray with a paper clip or simi-  
lar tool inserted into the eject hole in the far  
right side of the front of the tray. Straighten one  
side of a paper clip and push it gently into the  
hole. The tray will pop out a short distance.  
(Figure 5-1.)  
OK  
NO CARRIER  
NO DIALTONE  
CONNECT 56000  
(Connection complete at 56,000 bps.)  
ERROR  
6. Restart your notebook.  
7. Reset your operating system source to be the  
hard drive,if you wish.  
FAX  
RING (This means an incoming call.)  
BUSY  
NO ANSWER  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
i
v
e
C A U T I O N  
P O I N T  
Remember that you must set the Boot  
menu in the BIOS setup utility to CD-  
ROM Drive, or use the Esc key during  
the boot-up sequence to change the  
setting so the BIOS loads the operating  
system from the CD-ROM, not the hard  
drive. (See page 106 for ways to set the  
operating system source.)  
As long is there is no boot disk in the  
CD-ROM drive or the floppy disk drive  
your notebook will boot from the hard  
drive, regardless of the operating system  
source setting.  
Your notebook now has all of the software  
installed that was installed when you received it  
from the factory. You must now set up the file  
for your Save-to-Disk function (see Setting Up  
Your Save-To-Disk File Allocation starting on  
page 113), load any programs which you pur-  
chased and installed after you got your note-  
book,and restore your data files. If you did not  
choose the format and recover option your data  
files will still exist. You are now ready to operate.  
C A U T I O N  
User data and user installed applications  
can not be recovered from the  
Recovery CD-ROM.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S e c t i o n  
S i x  
C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c e  
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Caring for Your Notebook. . . . . . . . . . 172  
Increasing Battery Life. . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Caring for Your Batteries . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
i
x
If you accidentally spill liquid on  
your notebook:  
Do not put heavy or sharp objects on  
your notebook.  
SECTION SIX  
CARE AND MAINTENANCE  
If you use your LifeBook 900 Series from  
Fujitsu carefully, you will increase its life and  
reliability. This section provides some tips for  
looking after the notebook and the battery.  
1. Turn it off.  
If you are carrying your notebook in a brief-  
case, or any other carrying case,make sure  
that there are no objects in the case pressing  
on the lid of your notebook.  
2. Position it so that the liquid can run out.  
3. Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer  
if needed.  
4. If your notebook will not boot after it has  
dried out, call your support representative.  
Do not drop your notebook.  
CARING FOR YOUR NOTEBOOK  
The LifeBook 900 Series is a durable but  
Clean your notebook with a damp, lint-free  
cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents.  
Avoid exposure to water, sand, dust,and  
other environmental hazards.  
sensitive electronic device. Treat it with  
respect and care.  
Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen.  
Do not expose your notebook to direct sunlight  
for long periods of time as temperatures above  
140° F (60° C) may damage your notebook.  
Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable  
carrying case.  
Keep it away from food and beverages.  
Keep the covers closed on the connectors and  
slots when they are not in use.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F uj i t su  
C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c e  
6. Put your notebook in Suspend mode when it  
is turned on and you are not actually using it.  
INCREASING BATTERY LIFE  
CARING FOR YOUR BATTERIES  
To increase battery life:  
If your notebook is to be stored for a month  
or longer, turn the machine off and remove  
all Lithium ion batteries. Store your notebook  
and batteries separately in a cool,dry location.  
If you store your notebook with a battery  
installed,the battery will discharge,and battery  
life will be reduced. In addition,a faulty battery  
might damage your notebook.  
7.Limit your CD-ROM access.  
1.  
Power your notebook through the AC  
or optional auto/airline adapter  
whenever possible.  
8. Disable the Windows 95 CD automatic  
insertion function. (See page 47.)  
2. If your notebook is running on battery  
power all day, connect it to the AC adapter  
overnight to recharge the battery.  
9. Always use fully charged batteries.  
3. Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable.  
4. Keep the volume level as low as possible for  
comfortable operation.  
5. Set the power management for the maximum  
battery life profile of the PowerPanel settings  
or set an even longer life combination with  
the BIOSsetup utility. (See page 96 for  
instruction on these settings.)  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A p p e n d i c e s  
S p e c i f i c a t i o n s a n d G l o s s a r y  
Appendix A – Specifications  
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
LifeBook 990Tx2 Specifications . . . . . . . 176  
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Popular Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Appendix B – Glossary  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
L2 Cache Memory  
512KB Pipeline Burst SRAM.  
Video RAM  
4MB SGRAM.  
APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS  
Appendix A provides the hardware and envi-  
ronmental specifications for your LifeBook 900  
Series and its peripherals.  
Expansion Memory  
Mass Storage  
Floppy Disk Drive  
16MB, 32MB and 64MB SDRAM Modules  
extend system memory up to 160MB; instal-  
lable in two DIMM (dual-in-line memory  
module) slots in a compartment in the bottom  
of the notebook. SDRAM Modules are recom-  
mended but EDO RAM Modules will work.  
Fujitsu product numbers:  
One modular 3.5", floppy disk drive which  
accommodates a 1.44MB or a 720KB floppy  
disk, Fujitsu Model FPCFDD04.  
One optional external floppy disk drive, Fujitsu  
Model FPCFDA02.  
WARRANTY  
Your notebook is backed by a limited warranty  
and includes toll-free technical support;call  
1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487.) Check the  
service kit that came with your notebook for  
warranty terms and conditions.  
Hard Drive  
One factory installed 5.0GB, 2.5" (12.7 mm)  
fixed hard drive unit.  
One optional modular 3.0GB hard drive,  
Fujitsu Model FPCHDD02.  
32MB SDRAM,FPCEM11.  
64MB SDRAM,FPCEM10.  
LIFEBOOK 990TX2 SPECIFICATIONS  
Microprocessor  
Intel Pentium II 266MHz,L1 and L2 cache,  
PCI bus architecture,and CardBus architecture.  
Installing an EDO RAM Module will cause your  
entire system to operate at the slower EDO timing.  
8MB EDO RAM,FPCEM01A.  
16MB EDO RAM,FPCEM02A.  
32MB EDO RAM,FPCEM03.  
CD-ROM Drive  
Memory  
System Memory  
32MB SDRAM with ECC.  
One modular, factory installed,24-speed  
maximum,2.5" (12.7 mm) drive,  
Fujitsu Model FPCCD05.  
64MB EDO RAM, Third party only.  
BIOS Memory  
L1 Cache Memory  
512KB Flash ROM.  
32KB within CPU.  
256 Bytes CMOS-RAM with back-up battery.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
A p p e n d i c e s  
Audio  
Video  
C A U T I O N  
SoundBlaster-compatible 16-bit stereo  
PCM/FM sound chip.  
Spatializer 3D-Stereo multiple speaker  
effect support.  
MIDI/joystick interface with adapter cable.  
Wavetable support.  
Stereo headphone jack, 1 Vrms, or less,  
minimum impedance 32 Ohms.  
Stereo line input jack,880 mVrms or less,  
minimum impedance 10K Ohms.  
Mono microphone jack,125 mVp-p or less,  
minimum impedance 10K Ohms.  
Two built-in speakers – 28 mm  
diameter (stereo).  
MPEG-1 video data decompression software.  
Zoomed Video support via PC Card Slot 1.  
3D-Graphics support.  
TV input/output in NTSC/PAL and S-Video  
composite video formats.  
Your internal modem is designed to allow  
faster downloads from K56flex compliant  
digital sources. Maximum achievable  
download transmission rates may not reach  
56 Kbps and will vary with line conditions.  
Pre-Installed Software  
Microsoft Windows 95.  
LapLink by Traveling Software.  
MegaPhone by AVEO, Inc.  
VirusScan by McAfee.  
C A U T I O N  
The internal modem on all notebooks  
distributed by Fujitsu PC Corporation  
are not intended for use with the public  
telephone networks outside the United  
States and Canada.  
Audio Rack 32 for Windows 95 by  
ESS Technology, Inc.  
PC Doctor by Watergate Software.  
Tioman ProSwap by Agaté Technologies.  
ATI Video Player by ATI Technologies.  
PowerPanel by Phoenix Technologies  
SoftPEG by CompCore Multimedia, Inc.  
One built-in monaural microphone.  
Communication  
Internal 56Kbps fax/data/voice modem (up to  
56Kbps data/voice transmission; 14.4 Kbps  
fax transmission) with DSVD (Digital simul-  
taneous voice and data) support. (Internal  
modem is upgradeable to the v.90 standard  
when available.)  
One IrDA compatible infrared port (4 Mbps).  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
One stereo line in jack  
Input/Output Connections  
Keyboards  
(see Audio specifications).  
One MIDI/joystick custom connector for use  
with a supplied adapter cable.  
Two RCA jacks; one for composite video  
output and one for composite video input.  
Two S-Video ports; one for S-Video output  
and one for S-Video input.  
One Type III/two Type I/II PC Card slots:  
PCMCIA Standard 2.1 with CardBus sup-  
port; Zoomed Video support via Slot 1.  
Two 6-pin mini DIN PS/2 compatible connectors,  
one for external mouse, external keyboard, or  
external numeric keypad.  
One 25-pin D-SUB two-way Centronics type  
connector for parallel input/output devices;  
Bi-directional, output only or ECP.  
One 240-pin connector for Docking Station.  
One 15-pin D-SUB connector for XGA external  
monitor (see Displays specifications).  
One 9-pin D-SUB connector for RS-232C serial  
input/output devices.  
Built-In Keyboard with 101 key PS/2  
compatible keyboard functionality.  
Total number of keys: 86.  
Function keys: 12, F1 through F12.  
Feature extension key: Fn.  
Windows 95 keys:3,two Start keys and  
one Application key.  
Key pitch:19 mm.  
Key stroke: 3 mm.  
Built-in ErgoTrac pointing device with left  
and right buttons.  
Built-in palmrest.  
Displays  
Built-in color flat-panel, XGA,TFT active  
matrix LCD display.  
Diagonal dimension: 13.3".  
1024 x 768 pixels resolution, 16M colors.  
800 x 600 pixels resolution, 16M colors.  
640 x 480 pixels resolution, 16M colors.  
SVGA, VGA,and XGA compatible.  
External Keyboard Support  
PS/2 compatible.  
One dual connector for 2 USB  
(Universal Serial Bus) input/output devices.  
One 25-pin special connector for external  
floppy disk drive connection.  
One modular RJ-11 telephone line connector.  
One stereo headphone jack  
(see Audio specifications).  
One mono microphone jack  
(see Audio specifications).  
External Numeric Keypad Support  
PS/2 compatible.  
External Monitor Support.  
SVGA, VGA, and XGA compatible CRT displays.  
1280 x 1024 pixels resolution,64K colors.  
1024 x 768 pixels resolution,16M colors.  
800 x 600 pixels resolution, 16M colors.  
640 x 480 pixels resolution, 16M colors.  
External Mouse Support  
PS/2 compatible.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
A p p e n d i c e s  
Dual Battery Configuration  
Power  
Dimensions and Weight  
Operating time of up to 3 hours. Rapid charge  
(notebook off or in Suspend Mode) in about  
5 hours.Standard charge (normal use with  
limited CD and hard drive access) in about  
fifteen (15) hours,using an optional second  
Lithium ion battery, Fujitsu Model FPCBP09  
in addition to the main battery.  
Batteries  
Overall Dimensions  
Approximately 12.3" x 10.2" x 2.4".  
(312 mm x 259 mm x 61 mm.)  
One Lithium ion battery. Rechargeable,10.8V,  
2800 mAh. Operating time of up to 1.5  
hours. Rapid charge (notebook off or in  
Suspend mode) in about three (3) hours.  
Standard charge (normal use with limited  
CD-ROM drive and hard drive access) in  
about nine (9) hours.  
One optional second Lithium ion battery,  
Fujitsu Model FPCBP09. Rechargeable, 10.8V,  
2800 mAh. Operating time of up to 1.5 hours.  
Rapid charge (notebook off or in suspend  
mode) in about three (3) hours. Standard  
charge (normal use with limited CD-ROM  
drive and hard drive access) in about  
nine (9) hours.  
Weight  
Approximately 8.8 lbs (4.0 Kg) with floppy  
disk drive,CD-ROM drive,and main  
battery installed.  
AC Adapter  
Environmental Requirements  
Temperature  
Operating: 5° to 35° C (41° to 95° F).  
Non-operating: -15° to 60° C (5° to 140° F).  
Autosensing 100-240V AC,43W, supplying 16V  
DC to the notebook, Fujitsu Model FPCAC05,  
includes an AC cable.  
Optional Auto/Airline Adapter  
Autosensing 12/24V DC, 43W supplying  
16V DC to the Notebook, Fujitsu Model  
FPCCAA02.  
Humidity  
Operating: 20% to 85%, relative,non-condensing.  
Non-operating; 8% to 85%, relative,  
non-condensing.  
Power Management  
C A U T I O N  
Altitude  
Save-to-Disk, Suspend, Idle and Standby  
power savings modes. When the battery is fully  
charged the computer can remain in Suspend  
mode for approximately 24 hours or more.  
Actual battery life will vary based on  
screen brightness, applications, features,  
power management settings, battery con-  
ditioning, and other customer preferences.  
CD-ROM or hard drive usage may also  
have a significant impact on battery life.  
Operating:10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum.  
Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)  
9 kV.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
LANdock, Fujitsu Model FPCDS11A.  
The LANdock provides connections for:  
Theft Prevention Lock  
C A U T I O N  
Lock slot on the left side panel for use with  
physical restraining security systems. The lock-  
ing system by Kensington is recommended.  
The AC adapter for the LANdock is not  
the same as the one for your notebook.  
Do not use them interchangeably.  
RS-232C Serial device.  
Parallel device.  
VGA/SVGA/XGA monitor.  
Mouse (PS/2).  
APPROVALS  
Emissions  
Port Replicator, Fujitsu Model FPCPR07A.  
The Port Replicator provides connections for:  
Keyboard (PS/2).  
FCC Part 15, FCC Part 68,FTZ.  
Slots for Two Type II/one Type III PC Cards  
without Zoomed Video support.  
Telephone line (RJ-11).  
10/100 Base-T Ethernet line (RJ-45).  
MIDI/joystick device.  
Two USB devices.  
External floppy disk drive.  
Stereo headphone.  
Safety  
UL,C-UL,CSA.  
One RS-232C Serial device.  
One Parallel device.  
One VGA/SVGA/XGA monitor.  
One Mouse (PS/2).  
FCC Certification  
See statement at the front of the Users Guide.  
One Keyboard (PS/2).  
DOC (Industry Canada) Certification  
See statement at the front of the Users Guide.  
One Telephone line (RJ-11).  
An External floppy disk drive.  
An AC Power adapter.  
POPULAR ACCESSORIES  
Other accessories are available, contact your  
authorized Fujitsu reseller.  
Second Lithium ion battery, Fujitsu Model  
FPCBP09.  
The LANdock can be powered from a power  
adapter which is included with the LANdock,  
Fujitsu Model FPCAC06.  
The Port Replicator is powered from the AC  
Adapter which is included with your notebook.  
Second 3.0GB hard drive, Fujitsu Model  
FPCHDD02.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
A p p e n d i c e s  
Bit  
Cache Memory  
APPENDIX B GLOSSARY  
AC Adapter  
A device which converts the AC voltage from a  
wall outlet to the DC voltage needed to power  
your computer.  
An abbreviation for binary digit.A single piece  
of information which is either a one (1)  
or a zero (0).  
A block of memory built into the microprocessor  
which is very much faster to access than your sys-  
tem RAM and is used in specially structured ways  
to make your overall data handling time faster.  
bps  
An abbreviation for bits per second. Used to  
describe data transfer rates.  
CardBus  
Active-Matrix Display  
A faster, 32-bit version of the PC Card interface  
which offers performance similar to the 32-bit  
PCI architecture.  
A type of technology for making flat-panel dis-  
plays which has a transistor or similar device  
for every pixel on the screen.  
Boot  
To start-up a computer and load its operating  
system from disk, ROM or other storage media  
into RAM.  
CD-ROM  
Auto/Airline Adapter  
Compact disc read only memory. This is a form  
of digital data storage which is read optically  
with a laser rather than with a magnetic head.  
A typical CD-ROM can contain about 600MB  
of data and is not subject to heads crashing into  
the surface and destroying the data when there  
is a failure nor to wear from reading.  
A device which converts the DC voltage from  
an automobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DC  
power outlet to the DC voltage needed to power  
your notebook.  
Bus  
An electrical circuit with at least as many wires  
as there are bits in your words which passes  
data between the CPU and the sub-assemblies  
inside your computer.  
BIOS  
Basic Input-Output System.A computer pro-  
gram and set of default parameters stored in  
ROM which tests and operates your computer  
when you turn it on until it loads your installed  
operating system from disk. Information from  
the BIOS is transferred to the installed operat-  
ing system to provide it with information on  
the configuration and status of the hardware.  
Byte  
8 bits of parallel binary information.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
CHS Translation  
Command  
DIMM  
Cylinder, head and sector translation.  
Conversion of hard disk access addressing to  
the cylinder, head and sector form. The termi-  
nology is historical left from the days when data  
was stored on a series cylindrical drums. The  
head designates the reading device, similar to  
the head on your cassette recorder only  
mounted on a movable arm. Another  
An instruction which you give your operating  
system. Example: run a particular application  
or format a floppy disk.  
Dual-in-line memory module.  
Disk  
A spinning platter of magnetic data storage  
media. If the platter is very stiff it is a hard disk,  
if it is highly exible it is a oppy disk,if it is a  
floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter it is  
commonly called a diskette.  
Configuration  
The combination of hardware and software  
that makes up your system and how it is  
allocated for use.  
addressing method is LBA.  
CRT  
Disk Drive  
Cathode Ray Tube.A display device which uses  
a beam of electronic particles striking a lumi-  
nescent screen. It produces a visual image by  
varying the position and intensity of the beam.  
The hardware which spins the disk and has the  
heads and control circuitry for reading and  
writing the data on the disk.  
CMOS RAM  
Complementary metal oxide semiconductor  
random access memory. This is a technology  
for manufacturing random access memory  
which requires very low levels of power to operate.  
Diskette  
Data  
A floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter.  
The information a system stores and processes.  
COM Port  
DMA  
Abbreviation for communication port.  
This is your serial interface connection to  
other equipment.  
DC  
Direct Memory Access.Special circuitry for  
memory to memory transfers of data which do  
not require CPU action.  
Direct current.A voltage or current that does  
not fluctuate periodically with time.  
Default Value  
A preprogrammed value to be used if you fail  
to set your own.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
A p p e n d i c e s  
DOS  
DVD  
Extended Memory  
Disk Operating System  
(MS-DOS is a Microsoft Disk Operating System).  
Digital Versatile Disk - Originally known as  
digital video disk,it is a compact disk and disk  
drive system which uses an interchangeable  
dual-lens system using lasers of two different  
wavelengths and data storage on two layers of  
the disk.Standard CD-ROMs are read with the  
longer wavelength, DVD-ROMs with a shorter  
wavelength.A DVD-ROM with two layers can  
store up to 8.5GB per layer. When used with the  
recommended MPEG-2 video compression the  
video is full-screen,full-motion.  
All memory more than the 640KB recognized  
by MS-DOS as system memory.  
Driver  
FCC  
A computer program which converts applica-  
tion and operating system commands to exter-  
nal devices into the exact form required by a  
specific brand and model of device in order  
to produce the desired results from that  
particular equipment.  
Federal Communication Commission.  
Floppy Disk  
A spinning platter of magnetic data storage  
media which is highly flexible.  
Floppy Disk Drive  
The hardware which spins a highly flexible disk  
of magnetic material and has the heads and  
control circuitry for reading and writing the  
data on the disk.  
DSVD  
Digital Simultaneous Voice and Data –  
A standard for sharing digital voice and data  
over a single analog t elephone line.  
ECP  
Extended Capability Port.A set of standards  
for high speed data communication and inter-  
connection between electronic devices.  
GB  
Gigabyte.  
ESD  
Gigabyte  
1,073,741,824 bytes  
(2 raised to the thirtieth power).  
Electro-Static Discharge. The sudden discharge  
of electricity from a static charge which has  
built-up slowly. Example: the shock you get  
from a doorknob on a dry day or the sparks  
you get from brushing hair on a dry day.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
Hard Disk  
IDE  
KB  
A spinning platter of magnetic data storage  
media where the platter is very stiff.  
Intelligent Drive Electronics.A type of control  
interface for a hard disk drive which is inside  
the hard disk drive unit.  
Kilobyte.  
Kilobyte  
Hard Drive  
1,024 bytes (2 raised to the tenth power).  
The hardware which spins the stiff disk of mag-  
netic material and has the heads and control  
circuitry for reading and writing the data on  
the disk as well as the disk itself.  
Impedance  
The amount of resistance to the flow of  
electric current.  
K56flex Modem  
The modem protocol co-authored by Lucent  
and Rockwell that enables high speed internet  
downloads over standard telephone lines.  
Traditional modems assume that both ends  
of a modem communication have an analog  
connection to the public switched telephone  
network.K56flex takes advantage of the  
situation with one end of the communication  
being a high speed digital connection.  
Infrared  
Hexadecimal  
Light just beyond the red portion of the visible  
light spectrum which is invisible to humans.  
A decimal notation for the value of a 4 bit  
binary number. (0-9,A, B, C, D, E, F)  
Example: 2F in hexadecimal = 00101111  
in binary = 47 in decimal.  
IR  
An abbreviation for infrared.  
IrDA  
I/O  
Infrared Data Association. An organization  
which produces standards for communication  
using infrared as the carrier.  
Input/Output. Data entering and leaving your  
computer in electronic form.  
LAN  
Local Area Network. An interconnection of  
computers and peripherals within a single  
limited geographic location which can pass  
programs and data amongst themselves.  
I/O Port  
IRQ  
The connector and associated control circuits  
for data entering and leaving your computer in  
electronic form.  
Interrupt Request. An acronym for the hard-  
ware signal to the CPU that an external event  
has occurred which needs to be processed.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
A p p e n d i c e s  
LBA  
Megabyte  
MMX Technology  
Logical Block Addressing. A method of locating  
data stored on a disk.  
1,048,576 bytes (2 raised to the twentieth  
power).  
MMX technology is an Intel processor enhance-  
ment that improves multimedia and communi-  
cation applications. The Pentium processor with  
MMX technology boasts three primary architec-  
tural design enhancements: 57 powerful new  
instructions specifically designed to manipulate  
and process video, audio and graphical data effi-  
ciently; Single Instruction Multiple Data (SIMD)  
enabling one instruction to perform the same  
function on multiple pieces of data; and more L1  
cache for a total of 32KB.  
LCD  
Megahertz  
1,000,000 cycles per second.  
Liquid Crystal Display. A type of display which  
makes images by controlling the orientation of  
crystals in a crystalline liquid.  
Memory  
A repository for data and applications which is  
readily accessible to your computer CPU.  
Lithium ion battery  
A type of rechargeable battery which is not sub-  
ject to the memory effect that Nickel Cadmium  
batteries are and which have a high power-time  
life for their size.  
MHz  
Megahertz.  
MIDI  
Modem  
Musical Instrument Digital Interface.A stan-  
dard communication protocol for exchange of  
information between computers and sound  
producers such as synthesizers.  
A contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator.  
The equipment which connects a computer or  
other data terminal to a communication line.  
LPT Port  
Line Printer Port.A way of referring to parallel  
interface ports because historically line printers  
were the first and latter the most common  
device connected to parallel ports.  
Monaural  
A system using one channel to process sound  
from all sources.  
MB  
Megabyte.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
MPEG Compression  
MPU-401  
Parallel Port  
Moving Pictures Experts Goup - An organization  
under the International Standards Organization  
which is tasked with generating standards for  
digital video and audio data compression.  
A standard for MIDI interfaces and connectors.  
A connection to another device through which  
data is transferred as a block of bits simultane-  
ously with a wire for each bit in the block and  
with other wires only for control of the device  
not for transfer of data.  
NTSC  
National TV Standards Commission. The  
standard for TV broadcast and reception  
for the USA.  
MPEG-1  
The first standard developed by MPEG which  
defined coding for a combined audio-visual  
signal at a rate of 1.5Mbit/sec. It is intended  
to process video with a source resolution of  
352 x 240 pixels at 30 frames/sec, one fourth  
the resolution of broadcast television.  
Partition  
Operating System  
A block of space on a hard disk which is set  
aside and made to appear to the operating sys-  
tem as if it were a separate disk and is addressed  
by the operating system accordingly.  
A group of control programs that convert  
application commands,including driver  
programs,into the exact form required by a  
specific brand and model of microprocessor  
in order to produce the desired results from  
that particular equipment.  
PCMCIA  
MPEG-2  
PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal  
Computer Memory Card International  
Association. The Personal Computer Memory  
Card International Association is an organiza-  
tion that sets standards for add-in cards for  
personal computers.  
The second standard developed by MPEG  
which defined coding for a combined audio-  
visual signal at a rate of 6.0Mbit/sec. It is  
intended to process video with a source resolu-  
tion of 720 x 480 pixels at 30 frames/sec, the  
resolution of broadcast television.  
PAL  
Phase Alternation by Line. The standard for  
color television in Western Europe and most of  
Asia and Africa..  
Peripheral Device  
A piece of equipment which performs a specific  
function associated with but not integral to a  
computer. Examples: a printer, a modem,  
a CD-ROM drive.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
A p p e n d i c e s  
PIO  
PS/2  
Resume  
Parallel Input/Output.  
An IBM series of personal computers which  
established a number of standards for connect-  
ing external devices such as keyboards and  
monitors.  
To proceed after interruption. In your  
Computer this refers to returning to active  
operation after having been in one of the sus-  
pension states.  
Pitch (keyboard)  
The distance between the centers of the letter  
keys of keyboard.  
RAM  
ROM  
Pixel  
Random Access Memory. A hardware compo-  
nent of your computer that holds binary infor-  
mation (both program and data) as long as it  
has the proper power applied to it.  
Read Only Memory. A form of memory in  
which information is stored by physically alter-  
ing the material.Data stored in this way can not  
be changed by your Computer and does not  
require power to maintain it.  
The smallest element of a display, a dot of color  
on your display screen. The more pixels per  
area the clearer your image will appear.  
POST  
RAM Module  
Power On Self Test.A program which is part of  
the BIOS which checks the configuration and  
operating condition of your hardware whenever  
power is applied to your computer. Status and  
error messages may be displayed before the  
operating system is loaded. If failures so serious  
that operation can not continue are detected  
the operating system will not be loaded.  
A printed circuit card with memory and  
associated circuitry which allows the user  
to add additional memory to the computer  
without special tools.  
SCSI  
Small Computer Systems Interface (pronounced  
scuzzy). An American National Standards  
Institute (ANSI) standard for connecting  
multiple (up to 7) high speed parallel devices  
to a computer.  
Reset  
The act of reloading the operating system.  
A reset erases all information stored in RAM.  
SDRAM  
Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory.  
Program  
Restart  
An integrated set of coded commands to your  
computer telling your hardware what to do and  
how and when to do it.  
See Reset.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
SGRAM  
Status Indicator  
System Clock  
Synchronous Graphic Random Access Memory.  
A display which reports the condition of some  
portion of your hardware.On your Computer  
this is an LCD screen just above the keyboard.  
An oscillator of fixed precise frequency which  
synchronizes the operation of the system and is  
counted to provide time of day and date.  
Serial Port  
A connection to another device through which  
data is transferred one bit at a time on a single  
wire with any other wires only for control of  
the device not for transfer of data.  
Stereo (audio)  
A system using two channels to process sound  
from two different sources.  
TFT  
Thin Film Transistor - A technology for flat  
display panels which uses a thin film matrix of  
transistors to control each pixel of the display  
screen individually.  
Shadow RAM  
Stroke (keyboard)  
The amount of travel of a key when it is pressed  
from resting to fully depressed.  
A technique of copying data or applications  
stored in ROM (Read Only Memory) into  
RAM (Random Access Memory) for access  
during actual operation. RAM is much faster  
to access than ROM,however ROM contents  
are not lost when power is removed.Shadowing  
allows permanently stored information to be  
rapidly accessed.  
UL  
Underwriters Laboratories - An independent  
organization that tests and certifies the electri-  
cal safety of devices.  
Suspend  
To make inoperative for a period of time. Your  
notebook uses various suspension states to  
reduce power consumption and prolong the  
charge of your battery.  
USB  
Universal Serial Bus - A bus standard developed  
by the PC and telecom industry to allow plug  
and play of computer peripherials.USB allows  
up to 127 devices to be run simultaneously by  
daisy-chaining. Dual USB ports provide two  
separate chains.  
SVGA  
Super VGA.  
SRAM  
Static random access memory. A specific tech-  
nology of making RAM which does not require  
periodic data refreshing.  
S-Video  
Super Video. A component video system for  
driving a TV or computer monitor.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
A p p e n d i c e s  
V.90  
XGA  
A new 56K modem international standard  
developed by the ITU (International  
Telecommunications Union).  
Extended VGA.  
Zoomed Video  
A CardBus enhancement which provides a  
high-speed I/O path for video. The Zoomed  
Video support on PC Card slot 1 of your note-  
book provides simultaneous audio and video  
conversion for use with digital video, digital  
cameras,MPEG and TV decoders.  
VGA  
Video Graphics Array. A video display standard  
originally introduced by IBM with the PS/2  
series of personal computers.  
VRAM  
Video Random Access Memory. A memory  
dedicated to video display data and control.  
3D–Stereo  
A sound processing system which produces  
a sound field which gives the sensation of  
three-dimensional sound from a single set of  
stereo speakers  
Write Protect  
Prevent alteration of the binary state of all bits  
in a storage media. Example: all information on  
a device such as a floppy diskette; a block of  
space in a storage media such as a par tition of a  
hard disk; a file or directory of floppy diskette  
or hard disk.  
3D–Graphics  
Visual displays that give the sensation of having  
three dimensions.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
n
d
e
x
AC  
Arrow icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Auto suspend timeout . . . . . . . . . . 98,101  
Automatic insertion function . . 21-22,37,173  
Boot  
Booting . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 57,77,105  
adapter . . . . . . . . . 2-3,7,11-12,19-20,  
23-27,29,53, 121-122,  
129-130,138,146, 150,  
173,179-181  
adapter indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,105-107  
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 153,167  
sector protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-56,146,  
161-162,167-168  
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . 7,11,17-18,20-21,  
25-28,45,57, 118,  
Access indicators . . . . . . . . . . 21-22,24,40  
Active-matrix display . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Adjustment feet. . . . . . . . . . 10,19,36,139  
123-124, 155-161,  
171,173,179,185  
Bootable CD-ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . 57,151  
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 18,26,39, 160,  
163,173,179  
Battery  
level indicator. . . . . . . . . . 20-21,27-28  
life. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,26,41-43, 101,  
171, 173,179  
Advanced menu . . . . . . . . 55,68-71,73-75,  
Cache memory . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 176,181  
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
CapsLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,19,23  
CardBus . . . . . . . . . 126,176,178,181,189  
77, 79,81,83-84,  
86,88-89,  
power . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,11,41-42,173  
133,165  
Bi-directional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,178  
American TV standard . . . . . . . . . . 9,133  
BIOS setup utility . . . . . . 6,12-13,39-41,43,  
45-47,55-57,59,71,  
Applications . . . . . . . . . . 4,12,15, 20,22,  
24-26,39,47, 114,  
CD  
92,107, 133,150,  
automatic insertion function . . . . . 21-22,  
37,173  
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
121-122,128-130,148,  
158,161,165,169-170,  
179,185,188  
162,170,173  
Block addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,185  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
I n d e x  
CD-ROM  
access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,160,173  
Conditions of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Dead battery  
alarm level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
suspend mode . . . . . 29, 155-156,158-159  
warning condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Control panel . . . . . . . 22,30-31,34,38-39,  
drive. . . . . . . . . . . 2-3,6,17-19,21-22,  
24,26,36,50, 57,64,  
47-48,51,60,  
124, 126,142  
107,115-119,123,145,  
147-149,151, 169-170,  
176, 179,186  
Default value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Digital PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,132  
DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,176,182  
CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,46, 97-98,103,  
109,161,176,  
181-182,184-185  
Charging indicator . . . . . . . . . . 20,27,161  
Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
CHS translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 156,181  
Closed cover switch . . . . . . . . 5-6,163-164  
CMOS RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,182  
COM port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,182  
Communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,68,79  
CRT . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 68,79,133,178,182  
Disk  
Cursor. . . . . . . . . . . 4,6,13,29-33, 41-42,  
50,54,59,67, 77,89,  
diskette. . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,52, 61,93,  
107, 118,150,  
95,102, 107,118  
166,182,189  
drive . . . . . . . . . . 50,52,107,118,166  
errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Custom toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Data security . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 56-58,90  
Display  
compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
panel. . . . . . . . . . 4-6,17-18,23-25,33,  
68,103,133,142  
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-57,60-61,  
109, 147,188  
DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 71,74,182  
DMA channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
DC power . . . . . . . . . . 7,11,140, 144,181  
Composite video . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9,53,79,  
133,177-178  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
n
d
e
x
Docking  
ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,136,179,183  
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,142,180  
European TV standard . . . . . . . . . . 9,133  
Faulty battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,173  
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 116,139  
station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4,43, 47,49,  
126,146,169,177  
Double-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,41,48  
Drive designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,183  
Exit menu . . . . . . . . . . . 55,59,67,89,95,  
102, 107,110-112  
Feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,18-19,36,  
139,179  
Extended memory . . . . . . . 62,136, 166,183  
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 152,154,  
165,183,186  
File transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-49  
Fixed disk . . . . . . . . . . . . 93-94,166-167  
External floppy disk drive . . . . . . . 7,22,34,  
52,56,75, 116,  
DSVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,177,183  
121-122,140,144,  
Floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . 2-3,6-7, 17,19,  
22,24, 34-36,50,52,  
176,178,180  
DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,22, 50,57,  
116-117  
External monitor . . . . . . . . . 4,8-9, 33,57,  
115-116,133, 140,  
56,61,75, 115-117,  
121-122,140,144, 147,  
150, 166-167,170, 176,  
178-180,183  
ECP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,178,183  
Electro-static discharge . . . 134,136,179,183  
144,163,165,178  
F1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 58-59,167,178  
F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,56-58,136, 161,167  
F5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,59  
F9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
F10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,59,133, 163,165  
Floppy disk drive access indicator . . . . 22,35  
Floppy disk format . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,57  
ErgoTrac . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 13,17,29-31,  
33,44,77, 151,178  
Error message . . . . . . . . . . . 13,24, 46,51,  
58, 162,165-167  
Fn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33,57, 133,  
163, 165,178  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
I n d e x  
Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33,178  
Gigabyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Half duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15,20,22,26-27,  
30-31,41,47,50-52,  
Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3,7-8, 115-116,  
129-130, 140,  
177-178,180  
60, 118,142  
IDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,75, 126,184  
Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,97, 101,103  
Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,184  
Inactivity shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Inactivity suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
K56flex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,47, 177,184  
KB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 109,184  
Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 44,46,64-65,  
97,101,166, 182,  
184, 186,189  
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,8,17-19,23-24,  
29,32-33,40, 46,49,  
Hard disk timeout . . . . . . . . . . 46,97,101  
69,76-77,91, 115-116,  
131, 140-141,144, 147,  
151-152,158,164, 167,  
Hard drive  
access . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,22,46,179  
access indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Infrared. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,8-9, 17,47-49,  
177,184  
178, 180,187-188  
Kilobyte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Internal hard drive . . . . . . . . 22,38-39,41,  
Hardware data security . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Hardware security passwords . . . . . . . . . 12  
Hardware volume control. . . . . . . . . 34,49  
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,181-182  
Headphones . . . . . . . . 8,115-116, 131,148  
Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,184  
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,35, 37-38,127,  
147-148  
44-45,93, 113-114,  
151,162  
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,28,126, 160,184  
Internal modem . . . . . . . . 3,8-9,17, 39,47,  
49,81,116, 131-132,  
LANdock. . . . . . . . . . 9,115-116,138-142,  
150,180  
169,177  
IrDA . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,9,47,73, 177,184  
IRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72-75,81-83,184  
LBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 182,185  
LBA mode control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
n
d
e
x
LCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,6,8, 52-53,103,  
133, 164,178, 185,188  
Megabyte . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,89, 109,185  
Megahertz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Monaural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,185  
Monitor . . . . . . . . . 4,8-9,33,57,115-116,  
133,140,142,144, 163,  
License agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14  
Memory  
165, 167,178, 180,188  
Lithium ion battery . . . . . . . . . 2-3,6-7,11,  
20,24, 26-28,41,50,  
cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,66-67  
capacity . . . . . . . . . . . 10,34,134-136  
upgrade compartment . . . . . . . . 10,134  
upgrade module . . . . . . . . 46,113, 115,  
134-136, 152,166  
Mono microphone . . . 3,8,116,131,177-178  
115-117,123-124,128,  
Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,8,29-31,33-34,  
69,76-77,91, 103,  
179-180,185  
Low battery alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,159  
LPT port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,185  
115-116,131,140-141,  
144,147, 151-152,  
MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109,185  
178,180  
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5,7-8, 34,  
Main battery . . . . . . . . . . 10,27,128-129,  
155-157,160,179  
49,115-116,  
131,177-178  
Mouse cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,77  
MPEG-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4,177,186  
MPU-401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . 55,57-58, 60-63,  
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3,7-8,48, 115-116,  
129-130,140,177-178,  
66-67,136,  
149-152,162  
180,185-186  
Multi-function bay . . . . . . . 2-3,5-7,10,20,  
22,27,34-35,50-52,  
Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,15  
Maximum battery life . . . . . . 18,41-43,173  
Maximum capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Maximum performance . . . . . . . . . . 41-43  
MMX technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
117-121,124,134-135,  
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4,8-9,17, 26,39,  
42-44,46-47,49,81,  
150,157,159  
Multi-sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
100,116,126,131-132,  
145,147,153, 160,169,  
177,184-186,189  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
I n d e x  
NTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,9, 79,116,  
133,177,186  
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,58,91-94,  
150-151,162  
Pointing device . . . . . . . . 4-6,13,17,29-31,  
33,44,77,151,178  
Numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . 8,23,32-33,  
116, 131,178  
Password on boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,93  
Port replicator . . . . . . . . . 9,115-116,138,  
140-144,150,180  
PC card. . . . . . . . . . . 4,6-7, 19,22-24,40,  
47,49, 100,116,126-128,  
NumLk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,19, 23,32-33  
POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,56,58,64,93,  
136,153,162-163,  
140,142,146-147,154-155,  
160,166,177-178,181,189  
Operating system . . . . . . . 4,12-13,15,24,  
34-35,38-39,47,55-58,  
60,69,93,95, 104-107,  
166-168,187  
PC card access indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
PC-Doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,48,147  
PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 178,186  
Peripheral device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,184  
PHDISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,113-114  
PIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,187  
Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,187  
Pixel . . . . . . . . . . 33,79,165,181,187-188  
Plug & Play . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,68-69,188  
Power  
111,114,124-125,142,  
148-149,151-152, 161-162,  
165-167,169-170,  
adapter . . . . . . . . . . 20,28, 42-43,134,  
155-160,180  
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,29,40  
management . . . . . . . . . 4,6,17, 26,28,  
39,41-43,46-47,55,  
57,91,93,96, 158,  
163-164, 173,179  
on self test . . . . . . . . 24,56,58,93, 105,  
136,145,153,162-163,  
166-168,187  
savings . . . . . . . . . . 6,39-40,42-43,45,  
47,97,101, 158,  
160-161, 164,179  
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,28-29,44,  
146,157,159  
181-183,186-187  
Output only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,178  
PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,9,79,116,133,  
177,186  
Parallel port. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 68,74-75,  
115-116,132, 140,  
144, 153,186  
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 186,189  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
n
d
e
x
Power (continued)  
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,126,137,166, 168,  
176, 181-182,187-188  
ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 181,187-188  
RS-232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,132  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,19-21,23-26,  
29, 44,52-53,56,  
Real time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Recovery CD-ROM. . . . . . 2,15,39,169-170  
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,15,26  
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . 12,56-57,85, 169,187  
91,99,128, 134,136,  
139,141, 146,151,  
S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,8-9, 53-54,116,  
133, 177-178,188  
155-159,168  
Save-to-disk file allocation . . . . . . 39, 46,55,  
113,170  
PowerPanel . . . . . . . 4,27,39,41-45, 47-48,  
57,96,158, 160,  
Save-to-disk mode. . . . . . . 19, 28,33,40-41,  
164, 173,177  
Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,22,25,35,44,  
46-47,52,56, 58,91,  
44-46,93,  
99-100,142  
PowerPanel toolbar. . . . . . . 27,41-42, 44-45  
113-114,142,151-152,  
154,157,166,169,187  
Pre-installed software . . . . . 4,13,15, 17,39,  
48, 145,177  
Scr Lk indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,187  
SDRAM . . . . . . . . . . 3,109,134,176,187  
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6, 20-21,25,29,  
33, 40,43-46,50-52,91,  
Presentation profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Product code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
93,99-100,103, 120,139,  
142,151,157-159,161,  
Second lithium ion battery . . . . . 3,6,11,20,  
24,26-27, 115-117,  
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 49,52,57-58,  
163-164,167,187  
147, 168,181,  
183,187  
123-124,179-180  
Resume on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-65  
RJ-11 . . . . . . . . . 2, 8-9,116,131,140-141,  
144,178,180  
Quiet boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
RJ-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,180  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
I n d e x  
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,55-59,90-95,  
Software data security . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Software volume control. . . . . . . . . 34,148  
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,5,177  
Speakerphone . . . . . . . . . . 4,34,43,47,49  
SRAM . . . . . . . . . . 116, 126,166, 176,188  
Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . 44,46,163-164  
Standby timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,101  
Stereo line in . . . . . 3,7-8,115-116,131,178  
Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,188  
Supervisor password. . . . . . . . . . . . 92-93  
130,150-151,  
162,180  
Security menu . . . . . . . . . 12, 55,90,92-95,  
151,162  
Support representative . . . . 10,27,46, 49,91,  
124,146-147,162-  
Serial port . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 73-74,103,115-  
116, 132,140, 144,188  
163,166-168,172  
Suspend . . . . . . . . . . 5-6,11, 19-21,23,25,  
28-29, 33,39-46,49-52,  
91,93,98-101, 103,118-  
120, 127,139-142, 151,  
Setup utility . . . . . . . . . 6,12-13,24,39-41,  
43,45-47,55-60,62-63,  
66-68,71,76, 78,80,  
Start menu . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 25,42,44-45,  
48,53,56, 114,  
82,84, 86,88-90,92,  
95-96, 102,106-107,  
110-112,133,136, 149-152,  
158, 160-162,164, 166-168,  
170,173  
155-159,161,163-164,  
140-142,151  
173,179,188  
Status indicator. . . . . . . . 5-6,17,19,26-27,  
Suspend mode . . . . . . . 6,11, 19,23,28-29,  
39-41,43-45,49-51,98,  
29, 40,99,  
155-161,188  
100, 103,118-120, 127,  
139-142,151,155-156,  
158-159,164, 173,179  
Shadow RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,188  
Shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Shorted batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Stereo . . . . . . . . . . 3,6-8,48,53, 115-116,  
131, 177-178,  
180,188-189  
SVGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,178,180,188  
System battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Stereo headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . 14,25,29, 52,56,  
128, 141,147, 151,161  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
n
d
e
x
System clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
System date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-61  
System error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,142  
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 12-14,24,26-28,  
30-31, 33,37-38,45,51-52,  
56-57,60-61,97-98,100,  
USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,8-9,115-116,132,  
140,147, 153,178,  
180,188  
123-125,133, 139,141,  
161,163-164,168,172,  
USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 147,153  
USB port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9,116  
User input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97-98  
User password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
User registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,15  
VCR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,53-54,133  
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
VGA. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 178,180,188-189  
System memory . . . . . 10, 44-46,62,98-100,  
179,181-182,188  
135-136, 168,  
176,183  
Transfer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . 24,58,137, 145-147,  
149, 151,153, 155,157,  
159,161, 163,165,  
System time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-61  
System timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
167,169  
Telephone. . . . . . . . . 3-4,8,15,26,47, 100,  
115-116,131,138, 143,  
Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
177-178, 180,183-184  
TV . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,8-9, 53,79,116, 133,  
177, 186,188-189  
Ten-key numeric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
TFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,178,188  
Theft prevention lock . . . . . . 7,115, 130,180  
Tilt adjustment feet . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,36  
Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4,8-9,33,42-44,  
46, 48,52-54,69,78-79,  
UL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,188  
Unauthorized access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Unit label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,147  
Universal serial bus . . . . . . . 9,116, 178,188  
88-89,97,101,103, 116,  
126, 133,147, 163-165,  
168, 176-178,180, 183,  
185-186,188-189  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L if e B o ok 9 0 0 S e r ie s f r om F uj i t su  
I n d e x  
Video output . . . . . . . . . . . 53,78-79,178  
Video timeout . . . . . . . . . . 43,46,97, 101,  
103,163-164  
Virus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 14,48  
Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,47,49, 177,183  
VRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,189  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . 2,4, 6,13-15,19-21,  
24-26,30-32,34,38-41,  
43-45,47, 50-52,56,60,  
86-87,96,118, 124-126,  
128, 141-142,149, 157,  
166, 173,177-178  
Windows setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Windows taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Write protect . . . . . . . . . . . 35-36,93,189  
XGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,178,180,189  
Zoomed video . . . . . . . 3,116,126,177-178,  
180,189  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Electro Voice Speaker System Force i User Manual
Extron electronic DJ Equipment MGP 464 User Manual
Fiesta Gas Grill EZA34545 B410 User Manual
Fisher Price Baby Accessories T4144 User Manual
Fluke Child Tracker 90100 User Manual
Fuel Fitness Treadmill FT96 User Manual
GBC Binding Machine P70IX User Manual
GE Home Security System 60 883 95R User Manual
GE Monogram Dishwasher 49 55086 User Manual
GE Monogram Nail Gun JSP39SK User Manual